Honda Manual BTY21616OM

User Manual: Honda Manual 2016 Acura RLX Owners Manual | Manual Device

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 561 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 0 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
00X31-TY2-6200    2016RLXOwner'sManual     BOM00331
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
●Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
●Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
●Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
●Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
●Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 1 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2Safe Driving P. 25
For Safe Driving P. 26 Seat Belts P. 30 Airbags P. 37
2Instrument Panel P. 67
Indicators P. 68 Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 97
2Controls P. 113
Clock P. 114 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 115
Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 136
Adjusting the Seats P. 156
2Features P. 191
Audio System P. 192 Audio System Basic Operation P. 196
Customized Features P. 265 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver P. 291
2Driving P. 341
Before Driving P. 342 Towing a Trailer P. 347
Multi-View Rear Camera* P. 429 Surround View Camera System* P. 430
2Maintenance P. 445
Before Performing Maintenance P. 446 Maintenance MinderTM P. 449
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 472
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 487
2Handling the Unexpected P. 493
Tools P. 494 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 495
Overheating P. 520 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 522
When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
2Information P. 535
Specifications P. 536 Identification Numbers P. 538
Emissions Testing P. 541 Warranty Coverages P. 543
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 2 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Contents
Child Safety P. 52 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64 Safety Labels P. 65
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 128 Security System P. 131 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 134
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 137 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 153
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 163 Climate Control System P. 181
Audio Error Messages P. 256 General Information on the Audio System P. 261
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 293 AcuraLink® P. 333
When Driving P. 348 Braking P. 405 Parking Your Vehicle P. 420
Refueling P. 440 Fuel Economy P. 442 Accessories and Modifications P. 443
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 454 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 466
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 475 Battery P. 484 Remote Transmitter Care P. 485
Cleaning P. 488
Engine Does Not Start P. 513 Jump Starting P. 516 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 519
Fuses P. 526 Emergency Towing P. 531 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 532
Refueling P. 534
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 539 Reporting Safety Defects P. 540
Authorized Manuals P. 545 Client Service Information P. 546
Quick Reference Guide P. 4
Safe Driving P. 25
Instrument Panel P. 67
Controls P. 113
Features P. 191
Driving P. 341
Maintenance P. 445
Handling the Unexpected P. 493
Information P. 535
Index P. 550
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 3 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
4
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 4 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
5
Quick Reference Guide
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 5 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 6 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
7
Quick Reference Guide
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 7 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Visual Index
8
Quick Reference Guide
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 8 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
9
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving (P 25)
Airbags (P 37)
●Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 52)
●All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
●Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
●Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 64)
●Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P 29)
●Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P 30)
●Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
●Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 9 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
10
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel (P 67)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 10 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
11
Quick Reference Guide
Controls (P 113)
Clock (P 114)
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
You can also adjust the time manually.
aEnter the Clock Adjustment screen.
2Clock (P 114)
bRotate to change hour, then press
.
cRotate to change minute, then
press .
ENGINE START/STOP
Button (P 137)
Press the button to changes the vehicle’s
power mode.
Turn Signals (P 140)
Lights (P 141)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 11 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
12
Quick Reference Guide
Wipers and Washers
(P 145)
*1:Models with auto wiper
*2:Models without auto wiper
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
: Low sensitivity*1
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2
: High sensitivity*1
: Higher speed, more sweeps*2
MIST
OFF
AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT*2: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Steering Wheel (P 152)
●To adjust, push and hold the adjustment
switch to move the steering wheel to the
desired position.
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 124)
●Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it in one motion.
●Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.
Trunk (P 128)
●To unlock and open the trunk:
•Press the trunk release button on the
driver’s door.
•Press the trunk release button on the
keyless access remote.
•Press the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
Trunk Release Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 12 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
13
Quick Reference Guide
Power Door Mirrors
(P 154)
●With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
●Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
●Press the folding button* to fold in and
out the door mirrors.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Folding Button*
Power Windows (P 134)
●With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows.
●If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
●If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Window Switch
Indicator
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 13 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
14
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System (P 181)
●Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
●Press the button to turn the system on or off.
●Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 211)
Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Switch
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
(driver’s side only)
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard vents.
AUTO Button
Passenger’s Side Temperature
Control Switch
(On/off) Button
Driver’s Side Temperature
Icon
Passenger’s Side Temperature
Icon
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Driver’s Side Mode Control
Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) and
SYNC (Synchronized) Icon
Passenger’s Side Mode Control
Icon
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode
Icon
Fan Control Icon
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 14 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
15
Quick Reference Guide
Features (P 191)
Audio system (P 196)
*1:Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
Audio/Information Screen
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
(Power) Button
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
SETTINGS Button
VOL (Volume) Knob
BACK Button
NAV Button
AUDIO Button
INFO Button
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
PHONE Button
Preset Icons*1
(Tune Up) Icon*1
Audio Source*1
(Tune Down) Icon*1
Tune
TAG*1
More
Button
Shortcuts*1
MENU Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 15 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
16
Quick Reference Guide
●Audio Remote Controls (P 195)
●SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/
CD/SiriusXM®/HDD/USB/iPod/Bluetooth®
Audio/Pandora®*/AhaTM/AUX.
●Left Selector Wheel
Roll to adjust the volume up/down.
Radio:Shift to change the preset station.
Shift and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/HDD/USB device:
Shift to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Shift and hold to change a folder.
Left Selector Wheel
SOURCE Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 16 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
17
Quick Reference Guide
Driving (P 341)
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 17 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
18
Quick Reference Guide
VSA® OFF Button (P 397)
●The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
●VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
●To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control* (P 360)
●Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
●To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the RES/+/SET/– switch
down once you have achieved the desired
speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
OFF Button* (P 415)
●When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
●To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 401)
●The TPMS monitors tire pressure.
●The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
Refueling (P 440)
aPress the fuel fill door
release button.
bAfter refueling, wait for
about five seconds
before removing the
filler nozzle.
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded premium gasoline with a pump octane
number 91 or higher recommended
Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 L)
Wait for five seconds
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 18 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
19
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance (P 445)
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 19 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
20
Quick Reference Guide
Handling the Unexpected (P 493)
Flat Tire (P 495)
●Park in a safe location and repair the flat
tire using the temporary tire repair kit.
Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.
Indicators Come On
(P 522)
●Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Engine Won’t Start (P 513)
●If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse
(P 526)
●Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating (P 520)
●Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P 531)
●Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 20 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
21
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
The power mode does not
change from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
LOCK position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the UNLOCK position.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 21 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
22
Quick Reference Guide
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
●The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.
Why does the beeper
sound when I turn the
engine off?
The beeper sounds when you turn off the engine with the
driver’s door open.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 22 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
23
Quick Reference Guide
Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?
●Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
●Check if the shift lever is in (P or (N. If so, move the lever to
any other position.
Is it possible to use
unleaded gasoline with a
Pump Octane Number
(PON) of 87 or lower on
this vehicle?
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 91 or
higher is recommended.
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic
knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine
performance.
Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to
engine damage.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 23 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
24
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 24 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
25
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 26
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 28
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 30
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 33
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 37
Types of Airbags ................................ 40
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40
Driver’s Knee Airbag .......................... 44
Side Airbags ...................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 48
Airbag System Indicators.................... 49
Airbag Care ....................................... 51
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......54
Safety of Larger Children ................... 62
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 64
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 65
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 25 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
26
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 26 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
27
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 27 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
28
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
9
10
11
12
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners/Seat Belt
e-pretensioners*
7
7
10
10
9
9
11
11
6
12
8
Knee Airbag
8
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 28 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
29
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
•After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 124
•Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 156
•Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 159
•Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
•Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2Child Safety P. 52
■Safety Checklist
1Safety Checklist
If the door and trunk open message appears on the
multi-information display, a door and/or the trunk is
not completely closed. Close all doors and the trunk
tightly until the message disappears.
2Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 86
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 29 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
30
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
-frontal impacts
-side impacts
-rear impacts
-rollovers
■Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable
retractor for use with child seats.
2Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 59
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 30 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 31
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
•All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
•Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
•Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the power mode is set to ON before the
driver’s seat belt is fastened, a beeper will
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver
does not fasten the belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while driving until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
■Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 31 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
32
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front
seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal
collision, sometimes even if the collision is not
severe enough to inflate the front airbags or
the driver’s knee airbag.
Are the motor-powered pretensioners that
start to retract the front seat belts when the
CMBSTM, brake assist system, or VSA® system
is in operation. They may also activate when
you steer the vehicle hard, or the vehicle is
impacted. After retracted, the seat belts are
slackened to their original positions.
As convenient features, the e-pretensioners
slightly retract the seat belts when you latch
the seat belt buckle, depress the brake pedal
more aggressively than you normally do, or
make a sharp turn, and fully retract when you
release the seat belt buckle.
■Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
■Seat Belt e-pretensioners*
1Seat Belt e-pretensioners*
If only the e-pretensioners were activated, no
components need to be replaced.
The e-pretensioners may not work if:
•Supplemental Restraint System Indicator is on.
•Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System Indicator is
on.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 32 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
33
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Continued
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2Adjusting the Seats P. 156
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
uMake sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
When you or the front passenger insert the
latch plate into the buckle, the front seat
belt retracts automatically.
2Seat Belt e-pretensioners* P. 32
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
Models with CMBSTM
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 33 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
34
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
■Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
Push
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 34 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
35
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 35 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
36
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
•Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
•Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
uIf a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 36 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
37
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
9
13
7
9
9
9
11
10
9
8
6
9
12
6
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 37 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
38
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, driver’s knee, front side, and side
curtain airbags are deployed according to
the direction and severity of impact. Both
side curtain airbags are deployed in a
rollover. The airbag system includes:
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
bDriver’s knee airbag. The knee airbag is
stored under the steering column. It is
marked SRS AIRBAG.
cTwo side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
dTwo side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
eAn electronic control unit that continually
monitors and can record information
about the sensors, the airbag activators,
the seat belt tensioners, and driver and
front passenger seat belt use when the
power mode is in ON.
fAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
The front seat belt tensioners also include
the e-pretensioners.
gA driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
hWeight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
Models with CMBSTM
iImpact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
jAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
kAn indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
lSafing Sensor
mA rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 38 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
39
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front and driver’s knee airbag covers.
Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the
airbags inflate.
■Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 39 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
40
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:
•Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
•Driver’s knee airbag: Airbag under the steering column.
•Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
•Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether the seat belts are latched, and/or
other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 40 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 41
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■Operation
■How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 41 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
42
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts, and in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags,
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 42 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
43
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger’s front airbag.
■Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
•Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•Do not place any cover over the passenger’s side
dashboard.
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger's
seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly
placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
2Floor Mats P. 489
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 43 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
44
uuAirbagsuDriver’s Knee Airbag
Safe Driving
Driver’s Knee Airbag
The driver’s knee SRS airbag inflates in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help
keep the driver in the proper position and to help maximize the benefit provided by
the vehicles other safety features.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbag is designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The driver’s knee airbag is housed under the
steering column for the driver.
The airbag is marked SRS AIRBAG.
When the driver’s front airbag inflates, the
driver’s knee airbag also inflates.
Even if the collision is not severe enough to
deploy the front airbag, the knee airbag may
inflate alone.
■Housing Locations
1Driver’s Knee Airbag
Do not attach accessories on or near the driver’s knee
airbag. They can interfere with the proper operation
of the airbag, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Housing
Location
■Operation
When
inflated
Knee
Airbag
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 44 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
45
uuAirbagsuDriver’s Knee Airbag
Safe Driving
■When driver’s knee airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■When driver’s knee airbag may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 45 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
46
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger’s in the
passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing
Location
■Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 46 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
47
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 47 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
48
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side will deploy, and
the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are
no passengers on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 48 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 49
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display.
■When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
■Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 49 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
50
Safe Driving
■When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2Child Safety P. 52
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
■Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:
•An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
•A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
•A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger’s seat.
•The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 50 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
51
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact an Acura dealer. For U.S. vehicles, Acura Client
Relations at 800-382-2238 and for Canadian vehicles, Acura Client Services at 1-
866-78-ACURA.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 51 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
52
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
•An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
•A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
•Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 52 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
53
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving
•Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
•Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
•Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
•Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
•Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2Safety Labels P. 65
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 53 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
54
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2Airbags P. 37
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to two years old if the child’s height and weight
are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 54 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 55
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 55 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
56
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
•The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
•The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
•The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 56 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
uWhen installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 57 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
58
Safe Driving
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Flexible Type
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 58 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
uInsert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
uIf you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
uWhen doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
■Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 59 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
60
Safe Driving
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 60 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether Anchorage Points
CoverAnchor
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
Outer Position
Center Position Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 61 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
62
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■Checklist
•Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
•Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
•Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
•Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■Protecting Larger Children
■Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 62 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
•Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
•Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
•Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
•Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
1Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 63 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
64
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
•The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
•The exhaust system may have been damaged.
•The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 64 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
65
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 65 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
66
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 66 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
67
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 68
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 86
Gauges and Multi-Information Display... 97
Gauges.............................................. 97
Multi-Information Display .................. 98
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 67 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
68
Instrument Panel
Indicators
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the brake fluid level
is low.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the brake system.
●Comes on while driving - Check the
brake fluid level.
2What to do when the indicator comes
on while driving P. 523
●Comes on along with the ABS indicator
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 523
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
●Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 522
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 68 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
69
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Electric Parking
Brake Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is
released.
●Comes on for about 15 seconds then
goes off when you pull the electric
parking brake switch with the power
mode in OFF.
●
Comes on for about 15 seconds then
goes off when you set the power mode
to OFF with the parking brake applied.
●Blinks and the electric parking brake
system indicator comes on at the same
time - There is a problem with the electric
parking brake system. The parking brake
may not be set.
●Comes on when you press the
electric parking brake switch without
depressing the brake pedal.
●Depress the brake pedal to release the
parking brake.
2Parking Brake P. 405
Electric Parking
Brake System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the electric parking brake system.
●Comes on while driving - Avoid using the
parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2If the Electric Parking Brake System
Indicator Comes On P. 524
U.S.
Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 69 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
70
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the automatic brake
hold system is on.
2Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the automatic brake
hold is activated. 2Automatic Brake Hold P. 408 —
U.S.
Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 70 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
71
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
a system related to braking other
than the conventional brake system.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
hydraulic brake boost system.
●Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●With this indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability.
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 71 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
72
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off either
when the engine starts or after
several seconds if the engine did not
start. If “readiness codes” have not
been set, it blinks five times before it
goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the emissions control system.
●Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s
cylinders is detected.
●Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
2Testing of Readiness Codes P. 541
●Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place
where there are no flammable objects. Stop
the engine for 10 minutes or more, and
wait for it to cool down. Then, take the
vehicle to a dealer.
2If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 523
Charging System
Indicator
●Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
●Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
●Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 522
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
●Indicates the current shift lever
position. 2Shifting P. 355 —
Transmission
Indicator
●Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem.
●Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts
and acceleration and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 72 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
73
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
M (sequential
shift mode)
Indicator/Gear
Position Indicator
●Comes on when the manual
sequential shift mode is applied. 2Sequential Shift Mode P. 357 —
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●Comes on and the beeper sounds if
you are not wearing a seat belt when
you set the power mode to ON.
●If the front passenger is not wearing
a seat belt, the indicator comes on
about a few seconds later.
●Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not fastened
a seat belt. The beeper sounds and
the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.
●The beeper stops and the indicator goes off
when you and the front passenger fasten
their seat belts.
●Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat belt - A
detection error may have occurred in the
sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2Seat Belt Reminder P. 31
Low Fuel
Indicator
●Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.8 U.S.
gal/10.5 Liter left).
●Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as
possible.
●Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 73 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
74
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator on,
your vehicle still has normal braking ability
but no anti-lock function.
2Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 410
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
-Supplemental restraint system
-Side airbag system
-Side curtain airbag system
-Seat belt tensioner
●Stays on constantly or does not come on
at all - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
●Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the EPS system.
●Stays on constantly or does not come on
at all - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 524
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 74 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
75
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Blinks when VSA® is active.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system or hill start assist
system.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 396
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
2VSA® OFF Button P. 397 —
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 75 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
76
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON.
●Comes on if the tire pressure of any
of the tires becomes significantly
low.
●Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS, or when a compact
spare tire* is temporarily installed.
●Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
●Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted
with a compact spare*, get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put back on your
vehicle as soon as you can.
System Message
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system
message on the multi-information
display appears at the same time.
●While the indicator is on, roll the right
selector wheel to see the message again.
●Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears on
the multi-information display. Take the
appropriate action for the message.
●The multi-information display does not return
to the normal screen unless the warning is
canceled, or the right selector wheel is rolled.
—
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 76 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
77
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Turn Signal
Indicators
●Blinks when you operate the turn
signal lever.
●Blink along with all turn signals when
you press the hazard warning
button.
●Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn
signal light bulb has blown. Change the
bulb immediately.
2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 467, 468, 469
—
High Beam
Indicator
●Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on. ——
Lights On
Indicator
●Comes on whenever the light switch
is on, or in AUTO when the exterior
lights are on.
●If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY
or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the exterior
lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
—
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●Comes on briefly when you set the
power mode to ON, then goes off.
●Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
●Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
then select the ON mode again.
●Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.
—
Security System
Alarm Indicator
●Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2Security System Alarm P. 131 —
Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 77 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
78
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Keyless Access
System Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the keyless access system
or keyless starting system.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator*
●Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button. 2Cruise Control* P. 360 —
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator*
●Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control. 2Cruise Control* P. 360 —
Precision All-
Wheel SteerTM (P-
AWS®) System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●If it comes on at any other time, there
is a problem with the Precision All-
Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) system.
●Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●The system may limit the vehicle speed to
50 mph (80 km/h) or less.
SPORT Mode
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
●Comes on when you press the
SPORT button.
2SPORT Mode P. 359 —
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 78 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
79
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW)
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the FCW system.
●Stays on constantly without FCW off -
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Comes on when the FCW system
shuts itself off.
●Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW
system is too high. The system activates
when the temperature inside the system
cools down.
2Automatic shutoff P. 379
●Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2Automatic shutoff P. 379
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 79 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
80
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the LDW system.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●Comes on when the LDW system
shuts itself off.
●Stays on - The temperature inside the LDW
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
The system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW
Camera) P. 382
●Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW
Camera) P. 382
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 80 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
81
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the RDM system.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●Comes on when the RDM system
shuts itself off.
●Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
The system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
●Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 81 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
82
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator
(Amber)*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
ACC with LSF.
●Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Comes on if anything covers the
radar sensor cover and prevents the
sensor from detecting a vehicle in
front.
●May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
●ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled.
●When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dear if the
indicator does not go off even after you
clean the sensor cover.
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator (Green)*
●Comes on when you press the MAIN
button.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF)* P. 365 —
●Comes on if the temperature inside
the camera is too high.
●ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled.
●Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
●Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the MAIN button can
resume the system.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF)* P. 365
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 82 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
83
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the LKAS.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Green)*
●Comes on when you press the MAIN
button.
2Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
P. 389 —
●Comes on if the temperature inside
the camera is too high.
●The LKAS has been automatically
canceled.
●Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
●Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the LKAS button can
resume the system.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
2Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
P. 389
●Comes on when the area around the
camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and
wipe it off with a soft cloth.
●May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 83 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
84
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Blind Spot
Information (BSI)
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●Stays on while BSI is turned off.
—
●Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of sensor.
●Comes on while driving - Remove
the obstacle in the vicinity of sensor.
2Blind Spot Information (BSI)
System* P. 399
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the system.
●Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Collision
Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●Comes on when you deactivate the
CMBSTM. A multi-information display
message appears for five seconds.
●Comes on if there is a problem with
the CMBSTM.
●Stays on constantly without the
CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 412
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 84 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
85
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Collision
Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator*
●Comes on when the CMBSTM system
shuts itself off.
●Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
●When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
message does not disappear even after you
clean the sensor cover.
2Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)* P. 412
●Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high. Use the climate control
system to cool down the camera. The
system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 85 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
86
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Roll the right selector wheel to see the message again with the
system message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely closed.
●Appears if any door or the trunk is opened while driving.
The beeper sounds.
●Goes off when all doors and the trunk are closed.
●Appears if there is a problem a problem with the e-
pretensioner system*.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Appears when the washer fluid is low. ●Refill the washer fluid.
2Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 465
●Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
●Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
2Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-
Information Display P. 451
●Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high. 2Overheating P. 520
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 86 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
87
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the transmission fluid temperature is too
high.
●Stop in a safe place in (P. Let the engine idle until the
message disappears.
●Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the
battery.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2Checking the Battery P. 484
●Appears along with the battery charging system indicator
when the battery is not charging.
●Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to
reduce electricity consumption.
2If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 522
●Appears when the starter system has a problem. ●As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Appears if the keyless access remote battery is too weak
to start the engine or the key is not within operating
range to start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.
●Bring the keyless access remote in front of the ENGINE
START/STOP button to be touched with.
2If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 514
U.S.
Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 87 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
88
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the power
mode is in ACCESSORY.
●Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
●Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
●Appears when you close the door with the power mode in
ON without the keyless access remote inside the vehicle.
●Disappears when you bring the keyless access remote
back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2Keyless Access Remote Reminder P. 139
●Appears when the keyless access remote battery becomes
weak.
●Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2Replacing the Button Battery P. 485
●Appears three seconds after you bring the keyless access
remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button
when To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button
appears. To Start Engine: Brake + Push appears
sequentially.
●Unless you bring the keyless access remote in front of the
ENGINE START/STOP button, this message does not
appear.
2If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 514
●Appears when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or
ON. 2Starting the Engine P. 348
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 88 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
89
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP button to
turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P.
●Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
●Appears if there is a problem with the radiator system. ●Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
●Appears when there is a problem with the headlights. ●Appears while driving - The low beam headlights may
not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safety,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
●Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically
canceled while it is in operation.
●Immediately depress the brake pedal.
●Appears when the automatic brake hold system is turned
off. 2Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 89 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
90
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed
without wearing the driver’s seat belt.
●Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
2Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
●Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed
without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic
brake hold is in operation.
●Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
2Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
●Appears when the parking brake is applied automatically
while it is in operation. 2Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
2Parking Brake P. 405
●Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a
vehicle in front of you.
●Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply
the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
2Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
P. 412
2Forward Collision Warning (FCW) P. 378
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 90 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
91
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor
system.
●Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even after
you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when your vehicle is too close to the traffic lane
lines. The beeper sounds.
●Take appropriate action to keep your vehicle within the
lane lines.
2Lane Departure Warning (LDW) P. 381
Models with parking sensor system
Models with lane departure warning system
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 91 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
92
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled.
●You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC with LSF to cancel improves. Press the RES/
+/SET/– switch up.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears when the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC with LSF
is in operation.
●ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you is too close.
●ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with LSF.
●ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
●ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
Models with ACC with LSF
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 92 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
93
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the shift lever is moved into any position
other than (D while ACC with LSF is in operation.
●ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the shift lever is in any position other than (D.
●ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep
slope while ACC with LSF is in operation.
●ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
●ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
Models with ACC with LSF
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 93 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
94
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while ACC with LSF is in operation.
●ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
2Parking Brake P. 405
●Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the parking brake is applied.
●ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
2Parking Brake P. 405
●Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is
depressed.
●ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)* P. 365
●Appears if ACC with LSF is canceled while your vehicle
is automatically stopped by ACC with LSF.
●Immediately depress the brake pedal.
Models with ACC with LSF
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 94 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
95
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
●Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
●The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
2Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 389
●Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line.
-The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is
drifting out of a detected line.
-The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is
drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers
the vehicle to help you remain within your driving
lane.
●Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
●The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
2Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* P. 385
●You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
●Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.
●Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
●Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system
related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically.
The beeper sounds simultaneously.
●If any other system indicators come on, such as the
VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2Indicators P. 68
Models with LKAS
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Warning Only
When you selected Normal or Wide
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 95 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
96
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door
while the engine is running by two-way keyless access
remote.
2Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback* P. 350
Models with two-way keyless access remote
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 96 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
97
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
■Speedometer
■Tachometer
■Fuel Gauge
■Temperature Gauge
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the needle approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2Overheating P. 520
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 97 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
98
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature
indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings
and other helpful information.
■Main displays
Roll the right selector wheel to change the display.
■Switching the Display
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 98 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
99
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
■Lower displays
Press the TRIP button to change the display.
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 99 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
100
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the TRIP button. The trip meter
is reset to 0.0.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F (U.S.) or ± 3°C (Canada) if the
temperature reading seems incorrect.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
■Odometer
■Trip Meter
■Outside Temperature
■Average Fuel Economy
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the TRIP button.
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display’s customized
features to correct the temperature.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 100 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 101
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was
reset.
Shows the current mode for ACC with LSF.
2To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control P. 377
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
2Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■Instant Fuel Economy
■Range
■Elapsed Time
■Average Speed
■Current Mode for ACC with LSF
■Turn-by-Turn Directions
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
Models with ACC with LSF
1Turn-by-Turn Directions
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 101 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
102
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2Maintenance MinderTM P. 449
Shows each tire’s pressure.
2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 401
■Engine Oil Life
■Tire Pressure Monitor
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 102 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 103
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
■How to customize
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by rolling the right selector wheel while the
power mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Push the right selector wheel.
■Customized Features
1Customized Features
To customize other features, roll the right selector
wheel.
2List of customizable options P. 106
2Example of customization settings P. 111
Customization is possible when you see the driver’s
ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen.
The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter
you have used to unlock the driver’s door. The
customized settings are recalled every time you
unlock the driver’s door with that remote.
When you customize settings: Shift to (P.
Customizing is also available from the audio/
information screen.
You cannot have Vehicle Settings displayed on the
multi-information display while the audio/
information screen shows the same menu.
2Customized Features P. 265
Right Selector Wheel
Roll: Changes the
customize menus and
items.
Push: Enter the selected
item.
Multi-information
Display: Goes to
Vehicle Settings.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 103 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
104
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
■Customization flow
Roll the right selector wheel to select Vehicle Settings and push the right selector wheel.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 104 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
105
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 105 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
106
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
■List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Driver Assist
System
Setup
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes at which distance FCW* or CMBSTM* alerts, or
turns FCW* on and off. Long/Normal*1/Short/Off
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep*
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle,
or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with LSF range.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit*Changes the speed unit for ACC with LSF on the multi-
information display.
mph*1/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h*1
(Canada)
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting*
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation
system.
Normal*1/Wide/Warning
Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep*Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. On/Off*1
Blind Spot Info*Changes the setting for the blind spot information. Audible And Visual
Alert*1/Visual Alert/Off
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 106 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
107
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language. English*1/French/Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed
time A.
When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed
time B.
When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
Turn by Turn Display Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on
during the route guidance. On*1/Off
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 107 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
108
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Driving
Position
Setup
Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and
off. On*1/Off
Auto Tilt and Telescopic Moves the steering wheel fully up when you get in/
get out of the vehicle. On*1/Off
Auto Seatbelt Tension*Turns the auto seatbelt tension setting for the seat
belt e-pretensioner on and off. On*1/Off
Keyless
Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle. Driver Door Only*1/All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors. On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
the doors. On*1/Off
Remote Start System On/
Off*Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors. 60sec/30sec*1/15sec
Headlight Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door. 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 108 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
109
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift
from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When Driver’s
Door Opens*1/All Doors
When Shifted To Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or built-in key. Driver Door*1/ All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Auto Folding Door
Mirror*Changes how you can fold the door mirrors. Auto Fold With Keyless*1/
Manual Only
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 109 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
110
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Wiper Setup
Wiper Action*Changes the setting for the automatic intermittent
wipers in the AUTO position.
Rain Sensing*1/Intermittent/
Speed Sensitive
Front Wiper Action*Changes the setting for the wipers in the INT
position.
Speed Sensitive*1/
Intermittent
Maintenance
Info. Maintenance Reset Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you
have performed the maintenance service. Cancel/Reset
Default All —Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default. Cancel/Set
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 110 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
111
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
■Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are
shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Roll the right selector wheel to select
Vehicle Settings, then push the right
selector wheel.
2. Roll the right selector wheel until Meter
Setup appears on the display.
3. Push the right selector wheel.
uLanguage Selection appears first on
the display.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 111 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
112
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
4. Roll the right selector wheel until “Trip A”
Reset Timing appears on the display, then
push the right selector wheel.
uThe display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When Refueled, IGN Off,
Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Roll the right selector wheel and select
When Refueled, then push the right
selector wheel.
uThe When Refueled Setup screen
appears, then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
6. Roll the right selector wheel until Exit
appears on the display, then push the right
selector wheel.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 112 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
113
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 114
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 115
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal
Strength......................................... 117
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 118
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 124
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 126
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 127
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 128
Security System ................................ 131
Immobilizer System .......................... 131
Security System Alarm...................... 131
Opening and Closing the Windows .... 134
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
....... 136
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 137
Turn Signals..................................... 140
Light Switches.................................. 141
Daytime Running Lights ................... 144
Wipers and Washers ........................ 145
Brightness Control ........................... 148
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button...149
Driving Position Memory System ...... 150
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 152
Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 153
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 153
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 154
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 156
Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 156
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 163
Interior Lights .................................. 163
Interior Convenience Items .............. 165
Climate Control System ................... 181
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 181
Automatic Climate Control Sensors......190
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 113 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
114
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does
not need to be adjusted.
You can also adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the
power mode in ON.
■Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate to select Clock Adjustment,
then press .
5. Rotate to change hour, then press .
6. Rotate to change minute, then press
.
■Adjusting the Time
1Adjusting the Clock
These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2Customized Features P. 265
You can turn the clock display in the audio/
information screen on and off.
2Customized Features P. 265
Hour
Clock/Wallpaper Type
System settings
Clock Display
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 114 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
115
Continued
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
■Keyless access remote
Use the keyless access remote to start and
stop the engine, to lock and unlock the doors
and to open the trunk. You can also use the
keyless access system to lock and unlock the
doors and trunk.
■Keys
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2Immobilizer System P. 131
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
•Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•Keep the keys away from liquids.
•Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the keyless access system may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the two-way
keyless access remote.
2Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback* P. 350
Models with two-way keyless access remote
Models without two-way keyless
access remote
Models with two-way keyless
access remote
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 115 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
116
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Controls
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the keyless access remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built-
in key, push the built-in key into the keyless
access remote until it clicks.
Built-in Key
Release Knob
Built-in Key
Release Knob
Models without two-way keyless
access remote
Models with two-way keyless
access remote
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 116 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
117
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
Controls
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless access remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
•Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
•You are carrying the keyless access remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
•A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless access remote.
■Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
1Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the keyless access remote
and the vehicle consumes the keyless access remote’s
battery.
The keyless access remote battery lasts about two
years. This changes by how often you use the remote.
The battery is consumed whenever the keyless access
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 117 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
118
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash, all the doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
uThe beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
*1: Checking Door Lock Status* P. 123
■Using the Remote Transmitter
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or keyless access system only when the
power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2Interior Lights P. 163
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
LED
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
LED*1
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 118 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 119
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2Replacing the Button Battery P. 485
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 119 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
120
Controls
When you carry the keyless access remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors and open the
trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
■Locking the vehicle
Press the door lock button on the front or
rear* door.
uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors lock; and the
security system sets.
■Using the Keyless Access System
1Using the Keyless Access System
•Do not leave the keyless access remote in the
vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
•Even if you are not carrying the keyless access
remote, you can lock/unlock the doors while
someone else with the remote is within range.
•The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the keyless access remote is within range.
•If you grip a front or rear* door handle wearing
gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or
may not respond by unlocking the doors.
•The door may not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
•Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the
keyless access remote if it is above or below the
outside handle.
•The keyless access remote may not operate if it is
too close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2Replacing the Button Battery P. 485
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
Models with door lock buttons
on all doors
Models with door lock buttons
on the front doors
Door Lock Button
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 120 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 121
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■Unlocking the vehicle
Grab the driver’s door handle:
uThe driver’s door unlocks.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s or rear* door
handle:
uAll the doors unlock.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
uThe trunk unlocks and opens.
uThe beeper sounds.
2Using the Trunk Release Button P. 128
Trunk
Release
Button
1Using the Keyless Access System
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
When you go into the front side of the keyless access
system working range with all the doors locked, the
front and rear* door outer handle ambient lights
come on for 30 seconds.
The lights do not come on if you have previously
stayed within the range for more than five minutes,
or the doors have been locked for a few days.
The feature activates again after you drive the
vehicle, then lock the doors.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized using the audio/information screen or
multi-information display.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 121 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
122
Controls
Fully insert the key and turn it.
■Locking the front doors
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the keyless access remote is inside the vehicle, and
any door is open.
■Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.
If you unlock the doors with the key, the alarm goes
off when you open the hood or move the shift lever
out of (P before the power mode is set to ON.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
Lock
Unlock
■Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 122 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
123
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
You can remotely check if your vehicle’s doors
are all locked or any are unlocked using the
keyless access remote from extended
distances.
Press the lock button, the Amber (LEFT) LED blinks once. Then after three seconds
one of the following feedback will come:
•Green (center) comes on: Acknowledges that the doors are locked.
•Red (right) comes on: Acknowledges that doors are not locked, or any door is not
completely closed.
•Red (right) blinks three times: The remote does not receive the door lock status
from the vehicle.
■Checking Door Lock Status*
1Checking Door Lock Status*
Operate the remote in an open space. If there are
buildings or other obstacles between your vehicle
and the remote, the remote may not work even
within the operable range. However, the range of
unlock, all doors, and panic functions are the same as
the standard keyless access remote.
2Using the Remote Transmitter P. 118
When checking the door lock status, you can also
start or stop the engine.
2Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback* P. 350
Red
Green
Amber
Lock Button
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 123 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
124
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 124 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 125
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
uThe door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
uThis setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the multi-information display or audio/information screen.
■Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The inner front door handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2Childproof Door Locks P. 126
Inner Handle
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 125 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
126
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either front door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors lock/
unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
To Lock
Master Door Lock Switch
■Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Unlock
Lock
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 126 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
127
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a
certain condition is met.
■Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■Auto Door Locking
■Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen or multi-information display.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 127 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
128
Controls
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
uIf it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Using the Trunk Release Button
Pressing the trunk release button on the
driver’s door.
2When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
Trunk Release Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 128 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
129
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
Controls
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
2When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the keyless access remote.
uThe beeper sounds.
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
1Using the Trunk Release Button
•Do not leave the keyless access remote in the
vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
•Even if you are not carrying the keyless access
remote, you can unlock the trunk while someone
else with the remote is within range.
•Do not leave the keyless access remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
Trunk
Release
Button
Trunk
Release
Button
Trunk
Release
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 129 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
130
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
Controls
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Pull the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Lever
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 130 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
131
Continued
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
•Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
•Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
•Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system with the keyless
access remote.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or keyless access system.
However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, then the shift
lever is moved out of (P or the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.
■When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
■To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or keyless access system. The
system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the keyless access remote in the vehicle can
result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 131 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
132
Controls
■Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
•The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
•The hood and trunk are closed.
•All doors are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter or keyless
access system.
■When the security system alarm sets
The security system indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
■To cancel the security system alarm
The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, or you grab either front door* or any door* handle while carrying the
keyless access remote, or the power mode is set to ON. The security system indicator
goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
•Opening the trunk with the trunk release button on
the driver’s door or the emergency trunk opener.
•Moving the shift lever out of (P.
•Opening the hood with the hood release.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the remote transmitter or
keyless access system.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 132 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
133
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
•The horn sounds.
•Some exterior lights flash.
■Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.
■Panic Mode
Panic
Button
Panic
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 133 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
134
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and
close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver’s seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver’s
window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
■Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■
Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button
Indicator
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
Rear Passenger’s
Window Switches
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 134 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
135
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
■
Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote
Unlock
Button
■
Opening/Closing the Windows/Moonroof with the Key
Close
Open
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 135 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
136
Controls
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
■Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Close
Open
Tilt
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 136 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
137
Continued
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
■Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the keyless access
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the keyless access remote
is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the keyless access remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button message appears on the multi-information
display.
2If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak P. 514
Operating Range
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off. The power to all
electrical components is turned off.
Press the button without the shift lever in (P.
Shift to (P then press the button.
Press the button.
Without depressing
the brake pedal
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the
button blinks (from ON to ACCESSORY). Operate
the audio system and other accessories in this
position.
ON
Indicator in the button is on. All electrical
components can be used.
Indicator
Shift to (P.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 137 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
138
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power
mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
When in this mode, you cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or
the keyless access system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
■Automatic Power Off
■Power Mode Reminder
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 138 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
139
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
keyless access remote is out of the vehicle. If
the buzzer continues even after the remote is
put back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.
■When the power mode is in ON
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the multi-information display notifies the
driver inside that the remote is out.
■When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
■Keyless Access Remote Reminder
1Keyless Access Remote Reminder
When the keyless access remote is within the
system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is
closed, the warning function cancels.
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the keyless access remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the keyless access remote on the
dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the
warning buzzer to go off. Under some other
conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating
the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even
if the remote is within the system’s operational
range.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 139 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
140
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Right Turn
Left Turn
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 140 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
141
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Continued
Controls
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode
setting.
■High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
■Lights off
Turn the lever to OFF either when:
•The shift lever is in (P.
•The parking brake is applied.
To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to
OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you
do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights
come on automatically when:
•The shift lever is moved out of (P.
•The parking brake is released.
•The vehicle starts to move.
■Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
with the lights on, a light on reminder chime will
sound when you open the driver’s door.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2Lights On Indicator P. 77
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
Your vehicle is equipped with the automatic
headlight adjusting system that automatically adjusts
the vertical angle of the headlights. If you find a
significant change in the vertical angle of the
headlights, there may be a problem with the system.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 141 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
142
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
When the light switch is in AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
■Automatic Lighting Control
1Automatic Lighting Control
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Light Sensor
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 142 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
143
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with
you, and close the driver's door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but
do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the
switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
■Headlight Integration with Wipers*
■Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Automatic Lighting Control
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
Setting The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Bright
Dark
1Headlight Integration with Wipers*
This feature activates during the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 143 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
144
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The low beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
•The power mode is in ON.
•The headlight switch is AUTO, or in .
•The parking brake is released.
The low beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch
is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker
outside.
1Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights come on dimmer when
the headlight switch is in than when it is in
AUTO. In AUTO, if the ambient brightness is dark,
the low beam headlights come on.
U.S. models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 144 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
145
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Continued
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
■MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■Wiper switch (OFF, INT*, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■AUTO*
2Automatic Intermittent Wipers* P. 146
■Adjusting wiper operation
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
■Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
them. Use the defroster to warm the windshield,
then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a
single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
circuit has returned to normal.
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
All models
MIST
INT*: Low speed with
intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
AUTO*: Wiper speed varies
automatically
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 145 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
146
Controls
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.
■AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When in AUTO, you can also adjust the
rainfall sensor sensitivity using the adjustment
ring.
Sensor sensitivity
■Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then
remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not put the wiper lever in AUTO when cleaning
the windshield or driving through a car wash. If the
wiper lever is in AUTO, and the power mode is in ON,
the rainfall sensor may respond to your hand or car
wash liquids, and the wipers may operate
automatically.
Rainfall Sensor
Adjustment Ring
Low sensitivity:
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
High sensitivity:
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 146 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
147
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
Turn the headlights on and press the
headlight washer button to operate.
The headlight washers also operate when you
turn the windshield washers for the first time
after the power mode sets to ON.
■Headlight Washers*
1Headlight Washers*
The headlight washers use the same fluid reservoir as
the windshield washers.
Headlight
Washer
Button
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 147 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
148
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the power mode is in ON, you can use
the (+ or (- button to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
To brighten: Press the (+ button.
To dim: Press the (- button.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The multi-
information display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.
■Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the multi-
information display while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
When it is bright outside and the headlight
integration with the wiper is activated, the
instrument panel brightness does not change.
Pushing or rolling the right selector wheel changes to
a different display.
If you press the (+ button until the brightness display
is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the
reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
(+
Button
(- Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 148 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
149
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door
mirror button to defog the rear window and
mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires and antenna
line.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires and antenna line.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 149 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
150
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
Controls
Driving Position Memory System
You can store two driver’s seat (except for power lumbar), steering wheel and door
mirror positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, or keyless
access system, the seat and door mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two
preset positions.
The steering wheel will move to the stored position when you set the power mode
to ACCESSORY.
The multi-information display shows you which remote transmitter you used to
unlock the vehicle when you enter.
•DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
•DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
1Driving Position Memory System
Using the audio/information screen or multi-
information display, you can disable the automatic
seat, steering wheel and door mirrors adjustment
function.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 150 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
151
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
Controls
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat, the steering wheel and the
door mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
uYou will hear the beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press memory button (1 or (2 within five
seconds of pressing the SET button.
uOnce the seat, the steering wheel and
the outside mirror positions have been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.
1. Move the shift lever to (P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2).
uYou will hear the beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat, the steering wheel and the door
mirrors will automatically move to the
memorized positions. When it has finished
moving, you will hear the beep, and the
indicator light stays on.
■Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
•You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
•You readjust the seat, the steering wheel or the
outside mirror position before the double-beep.
•You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
SET Button
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
■Recalling the Stored Position
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
•Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or
(2).
•Adjust the seat, the steering wheel or the door
mirror position.
•Shift into any position except (P.
Memory Buttons
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 151 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
152
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
Push and hold the adjustment switch to move
the steering wheel in, out, up or down.
Make sure you can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Adjustment Switch
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 152 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
153
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror and power door
mirrors* reduce the glare from headlights
behind you. Press the auto button to turn this
function on and off. When activated, the auto
indicator comes on.
■
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror and Power Door Mirrors
*
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 156
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror and Power Door Mirrors*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R.
Sensor
Auto ButtonIndicator
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 153 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
154
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
■Folding door mirrors*
Press the folding button to fold in and out the
door mirrors.
If activated, either side door mirror
automatically tilts downward when you put
the shift lever in (R; this improves close-in
visibility on the selected side of the vehicle
when backing up. The mirror automatically
returns to its original position when you shift
out of (R.
To activate this feature, set the power mode
to ON and slide the selector switch to the left
or right side.
Selector
Switch
Folding Button
Adjustment
Switch
■Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Slide the selector switch to left
or right to tilt down either side
door mirror.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 154 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
155
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
■Folding in the door mirrors
Press the lock button on the keyless access remote, or press the door lock button on
any door.
uThe mirrors start folding in automatically.
■Folding out the door mirrors
Press the unlock button on the keyless access remote, or grab the door handle on
any door.
uThe mirrors start folding out automatically.
The driver’s side door mirror has outer and
inner segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
■Automatic Folding Door Mirror Function*
■Expanded View Driver’s Mirror
1Automatic Folding Door Mirror Function*
You can turn the automatic folding door mirror
function on and off.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
1Folding out the door mirrors
The door mirrors do not fold out automatically if they
have been folded in using the folding button.
1Expanded View Driver’s Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver’s
side door mirror appear smaller than objects in the
rest of the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than
they appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Inner Segment
Outer Segment
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 155 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
156
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately depress the pedals without
leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■Adjusting the front power seats
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
Horizontal
Position
Adjustment
Height
Adjustment
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 156 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
157
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Continued
Controls
■Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch
Press the top: To increase the higher part of
the lumbar support.
Press the bottom: To increase the lower part
of the lumbar support. (The higher part
support is decreased.)
Press the front: To increase the entire
lumbar support.
Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar
support.
Higher part of
the Lumbar
support
Lumbar
Support
Adjustment
Switch
Lower part of
the Lumbar
support
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 157 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
158
Controls
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back. Doing so may interfere with
proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 158 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 159
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
■Adjusting the front and rear outer head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
•Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 159 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
160
Controls
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
■Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 160 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
161
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
■Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 161 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
162
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
■Using the Rear Seat Armrest
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 162 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
163
Continued
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ON
The interior lights come on regardless whether
the doors are open or closed.
■Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
•When any doors are opened.
•You unlock the driver’s door.
•When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless
whether the doors are open or closed.
■Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
•When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open
it.
•When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•When you lock the driver’s door.
•When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
• When you set the power mode to ON.
If you leave any doors open, the interior lights go off
after about 15 minutes.
Door Activated Position
Off
On
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 163 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
164
Controls
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the (map light) button.
■Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the (map light) button.
Front
Rear
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 164 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
165
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Press the release button to open the glove
box.
■Removable shelf
The shelf in the glove box is detachable. To
remove it, disengage the tabs.
The removable shelf can be stored upside
down in the glove box.
■Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove BoxRelease Button
Tab
Shelf
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 165 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
166
Controls
You can lock the glove box, trunk, and/or
navigation system, entering a PIN code from
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
To lock:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Valet.
3. Select the item you want to be PIN-
protected from the locked area, then select
OK.
■Valet Mode
1Valet Mode
If you need to give the key to someone else, lock the
trunk pass-through cover first, and give the keyless
access remote without a built-in key as a valet key.
2Trunk Pass-through Cover P. 174
Locked Area
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 166 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 167
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
4. The previous code is displayed. Select OK.
uYou will receive a confirmation message
on the display. Select OK.
When you enter the PIN code for the first time
or if you want to change the code:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Valet.
3. Select the item you want to be PIN-
protected from the locked area, then select
OK.
4. Enter your selected four-digit PIN code,
then select OK.
5. You will be asked to enter the same four-
digit PIN code again. Enter, then select OK.
uYou will receive a confirmation message
on the display. Select OK.
To unlock:
1. Select Valet.
2. Select Unlock.
3. Enter the four-digit PIN code you have
previously selected, then select OK.
1Valet Mode
The PIN code entering screen also appears when you
press:
•The glove box open button
•The trunk release button on the driver's door, on
the trunk, or on the remote
While the glove box or the trunk is PIN-protected.
If you have locked all the items of the locked area, the
PIN code entering screen appears with the power
mode in ACCESSORY.
You can cancel the valet mode when you manually
open the trunk.
2When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
If you have only set Navi, Phone, Audio PIN-
protected but forgot your four-digit PIN code, you
need to go to a dealer to have the set valet mode
reset.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 167 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
168
Controls
Your vehicle has a multi-function center
console. It includes a storage compartment,
an armrest, and a sliding tray.
Push the button on either side of the console
compartment to open the console
compartment.
You can put small items in the sliding tray
located in the console compartment lid. To
use the tray, push the button, then slide the
console compartment lid out fully. To close
the lid, push the button. It is automatically slid
back.
■Console Compartment
1Console Compartment
The console compartment light comes on when the
parking lights are on.
Button Sliding
Tray
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 168 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
169
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Slide the lid using release knob to use the
center pocket.
To close it, push the release knob. It is
automatically slid back.
■Center Pocket
Knob
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 169 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
170
Controls
■Front seat beverage holders
Press the raised detent to open the lid. To
close the lid, push it down until it latches.
■Front door beverage holders
■Rear seat beverage holders
The rear beverage holders are in the rear seat
armrest. Open the beverage holders by pulling
the latch up on the front.
■Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Push
Latch
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 170 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 171
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY
or ON.
■Accessory power socket (center pocket)
Open the lid and the cover to use it.
■Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
■Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power sockets are designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 171 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
172
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle
of both sides. Pull it down to use it.
There is a coat hook on the door pillar of both
sides.
■Coat Hooks
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 172 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 173
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The tie-down anchors on the trunk floor can
be used to install a net for securing items.
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
■Tie-down Anchors
1Tie-down Anchors
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 345
Hook
■Cargo Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 345
Hook
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 173 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
174
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Pull the rear seat armrest down and push the
button to open the cover.
You have access to the trunk from this
opening in the rear seat-back.
The cover latches when you push it back to
the original position.
You can lock and unlock this cover using the
built-in key.
■Trunk Pass-through Cover
Lock
Button
Cover
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 174 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 175
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
heated steering wheel.
Press the button on the left side of the
steering wheel.
When a comfortable temperature is reached,
press the button again to turn it off.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
■Heated Steering Wheel*
1Heated Steering Wheel*
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously
when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the
battery may be weakened, making the engine
difficult to start.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 175 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
176
Controls
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When a comfortable temperature is reached
while using the seat heaters in HI, select MID
or LO to keep the seat warm.
■Front Seat Heaters*
1Front Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 176 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 177
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
If the power mode is in ON:
Seat heater - The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
Seat ventilation - The HI setting ventilates
the seats faster than the LO setting.
Press the seat heater or the seat ventilation
button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When a comfortable temperature is reached
while using the seat heaters in HI, select MID
or LO to keep the seat warm.
■Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation*
1Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation*
Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation
even in LO when the engine is OFF. Under such
conditions, the battery may be weakened, making
the engine difficult to start.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 177 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
178
Controls
If the power mode is in ON: The HI setting
heats the seats faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When a comfortable temperature is reached
while using the seat heaters in HI, select MID
or LO to keep the seat warm.
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■Rear Seat Heaters*
1Rear Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
■Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 178 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 179
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The power rear sunshade can be operated with the power mode in ON.
To raise: Press the button.
To lower: Press the button again.
If the sunshade stops while moving, check for
and clear any obstacles, then push the button
again.
■Power Rear Sunshade*
1Power Rear Sunshade*
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the sunshade on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the sunshade before opening or closing it.
Front
Rear
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 179 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
180
Controls
Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the
way. Use the hooks to hang it.
■Expanded Rear Door Sunshades*
1Expanded Rear Door Sunshades*
Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully
closed. Using the shade while a window is open can
unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and possibly
hurting anyone sitting near the window.
Hook
Tab
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 180 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
181
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side
temperature control switch.
3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
In addition to the button/switch operations, you can control the climate control
system from the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM touch screen.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons/icons on the touch screen are pressed
while using the climate control system in AUTO, the
function of the button/icon that was pressed will take
priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button/icon that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may operate at low speed for a while after the
AUTO button has been pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the button switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.
When you unlock the doors with your remote, the
driver’s ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
climate control settings are turned to the respective
mode automatically when you set the power mode to
ON.
(On/off) Button AUTO Button
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Driver’s Side
Temperature
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 181 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
182
Controls
■Operating from the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1Using Automatic Climate Control
You can store two customized climate control
settings to the system and recall them from the On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
2Shortcuts P. 198
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
A/C (Air Conditioning) and
SYNC (Synchronized) Icon
Driver’s Side
Vent Mode Icon
Driver’s Side
Temperature Control
Icon
Recirculation/
Fresh Air mode
Icon
Passenger’s Side
Vent Mode Icon
Fan Control Icon
Passenger’s Side
Temperature Control
Icon
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 182 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 183
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
■Changing the interior temperature setting
1. Select the driver’s or passenger’s side
temperature control.
2. Change the temperature setting from the
following:
Temperature bar: Select a point where your
desired temperature setting is.
Farther to the left is for a lower, and to the
right for a higher setting.
3/4: To raise or lower the temperature
setting one degree at a time.
While you select and hold 3/4, the
temperature decreases or increases.
MAX COOL ON/OFF: To rapidly cool down
the interior.
uThe AUTO indicator comes on. The
setting returns to the previously selected
value when you select it again.
MAX HEAT ON/OFF: To rapidly warm up the
interior.
uThe AUTO indicator comes on. The
setting returns to the previously selected
value when you select it again.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
When you set the MAX COOL or MAX HEAT, MAX
COOL or MAX HEAT is displayed.
The side you selected.
Temperature Bar
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 183 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
184
Controls
■Switching the vent mode
1. Select the driver’s or passenger’s side vent
mode.
2. Select a desired vent mode icon, or Driver
Mode Auto (driver’s side)/Passenger
Mode Auto (passenger’s side): The system
automatically selects the vent mode most
suitable to the ambient environment.
Vent mode
: Dashboard vents and back of the center
console
: Dashboard and floor vents, and back of
the center console
: Floor vents
: Floor and defroster vents (driver’s side
only)
■A/C on and off
1. Select A/C.
2. Select ON or OFF.
1Switching the vent mode
While the climate control system is in AUTO, Driver
Mode Auto or Passenger Mode Auto is
highlighted.
The side you selected.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 184 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 185
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
■SYNC on and off
1. Select SYNC.
2. Select ON for synchronized mode, and OFF
for dual mode.
uWhen in synchronized mode, the
passenger’s side temperature and vent
mode become the same as the driver’s
side settings.
3. Adjust the temperature or change the
mode from the driver’s side.
■Changing the fan speed
1. Select .
2. Change the fan speed with one of the
following:
The fan speed level indicators: Select your
desired speed level. The smaller indicator is
for a slower speed, and the larger for a
faster speed.
(+/(-: To go up or down one level at a
time.
Fan AUTO: The system automatically
selects the fan speed most suitable to the
ambient environment.
1SYNC on and off
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side
temperature and vent mode, and the passenger’s
side temperature and vent mode can be set
separately.
You can also return to dual mode by changing the
passenger’s side temperature or switching the vent mode.
The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.
1Changing the fan speed
While the climate control system is in AUTO, Fan
AUTO is highlighted.
Fan Speed Level Indicators
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 185 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
186
Controls
■Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
1. Select , or currently
shown.
2. Switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions to the following:
(recirculation mode): Recirculates air
from the vehicle’s interior through the system.
(auto mode): Automatically switch
between the recirculation and fresh air modes
most suitable to environmental conditions. If
the ambient temperature is low, the mode
may not change to recirculation to keep the
windows from fogging up.
(fresh air mode): Maintains outside
ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode
in normal situations.
1Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
While the climate control system is in AUTO, is
highlighted.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 186 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 187
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
■Shortcuts
You can store two sets of your preferred temperature, fan speed, and vent mode
settings to the climate control system.
To store a set of the climate control settings:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Adjust the climate control system to your
preference.
2Climate Control System P. 181
3. Select Climate.
4. Select Edit.
5. Select Add.
6. Select Preset 1 or Preset 2 you want to
store your settings to.
To recall one of the settings:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Climate.
3. Select Preset 1 or Preset 2.
To delete a preset:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Climate.
3. Select Edit.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select Preset 1 or Preset 2 you want to
delete.
1Shortcuts
You can also store a set by pressing and holding the
preset number you want to store that setting after
step 3.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 187 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
188
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
2Switching between the recirculation
and fresh air modes P. 186
■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 188 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
189
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
You can set the rear passenger compartment
temperature different than the driver’s, using
the rear temperature control dial.
■Rear Temperature Control Dial
1Rear Temperature Control Dial
The rear temperature can be adjusted when the
climate control system is on.
Dial up to raise
the temperature.
Dial down to lower
the temperature.
Rear
Temperature
Control Dial
Position of driver’s
temperature
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 189 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
190
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 190 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
191
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 192
USB Port .......................................... 193
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 193
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 194
Audio Remote Controls.................... 195
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 196
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM....... 197
Audio/Information Screen ................ 205
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 209
Display Setup ................................... 210
Voice Control Operation .................. 211
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 219
Playing SiriusXM® Radio................... 224
Playing a CD .................................... 227
Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio.... 230
Playing an iPod ................................ 240
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 244
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 248
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 251
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 254
Audio Error Messages
CD Player......................................... 256
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio............ 257
iPod/USB Flash Drive ........................ 258
Pandora®......................................... 259
AhaTM Radio..................................... 260
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service ................... 261
Recommended CDs ......................... 262
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash
Drives ................................................264
Customized Features
............................265
Defaulting All the Settings........................289
Deleting all HDD Data ..............................290
HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver
.......291
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Using HFL ........................................ 293
HFL Menus ...................................... 295
AcuraLink
®
............................................333
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 191 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
192
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the SiriusXM® Radio service. It can also
play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disk Drive (HDD) audio, USB flash drives,
and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
icons on the touchscreen interface.
1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 261
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
When the screen is viewed through polarized
sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the
screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If
this is disturbing, please operate the screen without
polarized sunglasses.
Remote Controls
iPod
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 192 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
193
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port
Features
USB Port
Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect standard audio
devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
uThe audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1USB Port
•Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
•Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•We recommend your data backed up before using
the device in your vehicle.
•Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
You can return to the AUX mode by selecting
Change Source on the Audio menu screen or
Audio Source on the On Demand Multi-Use
DisplayTM.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 193 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
194
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display Enter code. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
uThe audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 194 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
195
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM AM SiriusXM®CD HDD USB
iPod Bluetooth®Audio Pandora®*AhaTM
AUX
Left Selector Wheel
Roll Up: To increase the volume.
Roll Down: To decrease the volume.
Push: To mute. Push again to unmute.
•When listening to the radio
Move to the right: To select the next preset radio station.
Move to the left: To select the previous preset radio station.
Move to the right and hold: To select the next strong station.
Move to the left and hold: To select the previous strong station.
•When listening to a CD, HDD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Move to the right: To skip to the next song.
Move to the left: To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
Move to the right and hold: To go the group up. (Bluetooth® Audio only)
Move to the left and hold: To go the group down. (Bluetooth® Audio only)
•When listening to a CD, HDD or USB flash drive
Move to the right and hold: To skip to the next folder.
Move to the left and hold: To go back to the previous folder.
•When listening to Pandora®*
Move to the right: To skip to the next song.
Move to the right and hold: To select the next station.
Move to the left and hold: To select the previous station.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some mode appears only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
To select audio mode, press the SOURCE button,
then move the left selector wheel to the right or left.
Left Selector Wheel
SOURCE Button
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 195 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
196
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the interface dial or MENU button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection. Move right, left, up or down to
select secondary menu.
MENU button: Press to select any mode. The
available mode includes Sound, Change
Source, Refresh Station List, Save Preset,
Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.
Play modes can be also selected from Scan,
Random/Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
1Audio System Basic Operation
Voice Control System
The navigation system is voice operable.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Move , , or to select secondary menu.
Audio Menu Items
2Sound P. 209
2Refresh Station List P. 221
2Save Preset P. 220, 226
2Radio Text P. 222
2Music Search P. 228, 232, 242, 252
2Scan P. 229, 233, 253
2Random/Repeat P. 229, 233, 243, 253
When you unlock the doors with your remote, the
driver’s ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
audio system settings and preset memory are turned
to the respective mode automatically when you set
the power mode to ON.
Interface Dial
MENU ButtonBACK Button
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 196 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
197
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Continued
Features
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Use the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM to operate the audio system.
Select Audio Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio
source.
Select More to display the menu items.
■Selecting an Audio Source
1On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.
Select to go back to the previous screen.
Use the / / / icons to turn the page.
X
1Selecting an Audio Source
You can change the order of source icons displayed.
1. Select Audio Source, , then Edit Order.
2. Select two icons, then select Done.
The locations of these icons are switched.
To go back to the original display order, select
Default.
■Displaying the Menu Items
Select Audio Source.
Source List Icons
Select More. Menu Items
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 197 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
198
Features
You can preset the settings of four or three
categories (Places, Phone, Climate, Audio)
from Shortcuts.
■Shortcuts
1Shortcuts
The preset memory is cleared when it is disconnected
from the power source, such as when the battery is
disconnected or goes dead.
Shortcuts Icon
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 198 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Features
■Places
You can store up to six addresses, and the home address for your preset
destinations.
To store an address on the selected preset
number:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Places.
3. Select Edit or No Entry.
uIf you select No Entry, go to step 6.
4. Select Add.
uAll the six preset icons appear.
5. Select the preset number to which you
want to store an address.
6. The screen changes to a list of addresses
stored in your address book.
7. Select an address you want to store as a
preset.
To enter one of the preset addresses, or
Home as your destination:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Places.
3. Select a preset number or Home.
uThe system starts to calculate the route
to your selected destination.
1Places
See the Navigation System Manual for how to store
address book entries, and enter your home address.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 199 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
200
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Features
To delete a preset address:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Places.
3. Select Edit.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select the preset number with the destination you want to delete.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 200 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 201
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Features
■Phone
You can preset five speed dial entries, and make a call from one of the preset
numbers, or call history when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle‘s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 299
To preset a speed dial:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Speed Dial.
4. Select Edit or No Entry.
uIf you select No Entry, go to step 6.
5. Select Add.
uFive presets appear. Select a No Entry
preset or an existing preset.
uThe screen changes to a list of previously
stored speed dial entries.
6. Select a number you want to store as a
shortcut.
To make a call from a speed dial entry:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Speed Dial.
4. Select a preset number.
uDialing starts automatically.
1Phone
Dial icon
You can make a call using the keyboard on the On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM to input numbers.
2To make a call using a phone number
P. 321
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 201 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
202
Features
To delete a speed dial:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Speed Dial.
4. Select Edit.
5. Select Delete.
6. Select the preset number with the phone
number you want to delete.
To make a call from call history:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Call History.
4. Select a phone number.
uDialing starts automatically.
1Phone
The call history displays the last six dialed, received, or
missed calls.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 202 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 203
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Features
■Audio
You can store up to six radio stations, and HDD audio album/play lists when playing
AM, FM, or SiriusXM® radio, or HDD audio.
To preset a station or song:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Tune to a radio station or select a song from
HDD audio.
2Playing AM/FM Radio P. 219
2Playing SiriusXM® Radio P. 224
2Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
P. 230
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Edit or No Entry.
uIf you select No Entry, go to step 6.
5. Select Add.
6. Select the preset icon you want to store the
station or song to.
To play a preset station or song:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Audio.
3. Select a preset icon.
To delete a preset station or song:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Audio.
3. Select Edit.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select the preset icon with the radio station
or a song you want to delete.
1Audio
You can also preset a station or song by pressing and
holding the preset icon you want to store that station
or song after step 3.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 203 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
204
Features
1. Select More, then Sound.
2. Use (+, (- or other icons to adjust the
setting.
1. Select More, then Screen Settings.
2. Use (+, (- or other icons to adjust the
setting.
■Adjusting the Sound
1Adjusting the Sound
Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2Adjusting the Sound P. 209
Instead of using (+, (- or icons, you can also touch
the point where your desired setting is.
■Changing the Screen Settings
1Changing the Screen Settings
The followings are adjustable screen settings:
•Sync Display Brightness
Selects whether the screen brightness synchronizes
with the instruments panel brightness.
•Brightness
•Contrast
•Black Level
•Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime modes.
•Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
•Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
•Vibration
Turns on and off the vibration when you touch the
screen.
•Fade Timer
Sets the screen black out timing.
Instead of using (+, (- or icons, you can also touch
the point where your desired setting is.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 204 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
Press the NAV, PHONE, INFO and AUDIO buttons to go to the corresponding
display.
■Switching the Display
Models with surround view
camera system
Models without surround view
camera system
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 205 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
206
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■Navigation
Shows the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 293
■Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
■Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■Deleting the history manually
1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press .
2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
■Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 206 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 207
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2USB Port P. 193
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
4. Move or to select the Clock tab.
5. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper
Type, then press .
6. Move to select Wallpaper.
uThe screen will change to the wallpaper
list.
7. Move to select Add New, then press .
8. Rotate to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
9. Press , then move to select Start
Import.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
■Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
•The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
•The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•The individual file size limit is 6 MB.
•The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•Up to 255 files can be selected.
•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 207 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
208
Features
■Select wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .
3. Move or to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
5. Move to select Wallpaper.
uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
7. Press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate to select Set, then press .
uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.
■Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .
3. Move or to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
5. Move to select Wallpaper.
uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
7. Press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
uThe confirmation message will appear.
9. Rotate to select Yes, then press to delete completely.
uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview
and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select
OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 208 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
209
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Sound, then press .
Rotate to scroll through the following
choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
DTS Neural Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
2Adjusting the Sound P. 204
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
MENU Button
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
Subwoofer
SVC
Center
DTS Neural
Surround
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 209 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
210
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Display tab.
4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate to adjust the setting.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Others tab.
4. Rotate to select Background Color,
then press .
5. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
■Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 210 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
211
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of
the navigation system functions.
The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
•Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
•Close the windows and moonroof.
•Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
•Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
•Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
•Refer to the Voice Help feature.
2Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■Voice Recognition
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 211 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
212
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
The system accepts these commands on the
Voice Portal screen.
•Call Your contact name
•Call Phone Number
•Find nearest POI category name
•Go home
•Route menu
•Cancel route
The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
•Call by number
•Call by name
Contacts that are imported from your
phone to the vehicle are all made available
by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded
for each of your Speed Dial entries.
■Voice Portal Commands
■Phone Commands
2Refer to the Navigation System Manual
The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
•Trip computer
•Traffic information
•Display clock
•Display wallpaper
■Navigation Commands
■Info Commands When the (Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.
■On Screen Commands
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 212 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
213
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
•Climate control automatic*1
•Climate control off*1
•Air conditioner on*1
•Air conditioner off*1
•Climate control defrost on*1
•Climate control defrost off*1
•Rear defrost on*1
•Rear defrost off*1
•Climate control fresh air
•Climate control recirculate
•Climate control vent
•Climate control bi-level
•Climate control floor
•Climate control floor and defrost
•Fan speed up
•Fan speed down
•Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)
•Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15
to 29°C)
•Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to
87°F, 15 to 29°C)
•Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57
to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)
•Temperature up
•Temperature down
■Climate Control Commands •Driver temperature up
•Driver temperature down
•Passenger temperature up
•Passenger temperature down
•Temperature max heat
•Temperature max cool
•Driver temperature max heat
•Driver temperature max cool
•Passenger temperature max heat
•Passenger temperature max cool
•Climate control sync on*1
•Climate control sync off*1
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
■Using Song By VoiceTM
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you
to select music from your Hard Disk Drive or
iPod device using your voice.
To activate this mode, you must press the
(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen
and say: “Music search.”
■Audio Commands
■Song By VoiceTM commands
•Music search
•List album (specify album)
•List artist (specify artist)
•List composer (specify composer)
•List genre (specify genre)
•List playlist (specify playlist)
•Play album (specify album)
•Play artist (specify artist)
•Play composer (specify composer)
•Play genre (specify genre)
•Play playlist (specify playlist)
•Play song (specify song)
•What am I listening to?
•Who am I listening to?
•Who is this?
•What’s playing?
•Who’s playing?
•What album is this?
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 213 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
214
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
■HDD commands
•Hard Disk Drive play
•Hard Disk Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)
•Hard Disk Drive skip forward
•Hard Disk Drive skip back
•Hard Disk Drive album up*2
•Hard Disk Drive album down*2
•Hard Disk Drive track up
•Hard Disk Drive track down
•Hard Disk Drive playlist up*2
•Hard Disk Drive playlist down*2
•Hard Disk Drive track random*1
•Hard Disk Drive track repeat*1
•Hard Disk Drive track scan*1
•Hard Disk Drive normal play
•What am I listening to?
•Who am I listening to?
•Who is this?
•What’s playing?
•Who’s playing?
•What album is this?
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
*2: These commands are available only in
the corresponding playback mode.
For example, “Artist” commands are
available only in “Artist” mode.
■Radio commands
•Audio on*1
•Audio off*1
•Radio on*1
•Radio off*1
•Radio select FM
•Radio select AM
•Radio tune to # FM
(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)
•Radio tune to # AM
(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to
1710 [seventeen ten])
•Radio seek up
•Radio seek down
•Radio next station
•Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)
•Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
•Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)
•Radio scan*1
•Radio select XM
•XM channel #
(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])
•XM channel down
•XM category up
•XM category down
•XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
•XM scan*1
•XM category mode
•XM channel mode
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
NOTE:
Radio volume levels cannot be controlled
using voice control.
■Disc commands
•Disc play
•Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)
•Disc skip forward
•Disc skip back
•Disc track random*1
•Disc track repeat*1
•Disc track scan*1
•Disc folder up
•Disc folder down
•Disc folder random*1
•Disc folder repeat*1
•Disc folder scan*1
•Disc normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 214 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
215
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
■iPod commands
•iPod play
•iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)
•iPod skip forward
•iPod skip back
•iPod track shuffle*1
•iPod album shuffle*1
•iPod track repeat*1
•iPod normal play
•What am I listening to?
•Who am I listening to?
•Who is this?
•What’s playing?
•Who’s playing?
•What album is this?
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
■USB commands
•USB play
•USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)
•USB skip forward
•USB skip back
•USB track random*1
•USB track repeat*1
•USB track scan*1
•USB folder up
•USB folder down
•USB folder random*1
•USB folder repeat*1
•USB folder scan*1
•USB normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
■Bluetooth® Audio commands
•Bluetooth Audio play
•Bluetooth Audio skip forward
•Bluetooth Audio skip back
•Bluetooth Audio group up
•Bluetooth Audio group down
•Bluetooth Audio pause
•Bluetooth Audio resume
•Bluetooth Audio track random
•Bluetooth Audio track repeat
NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.
■AUX commands
•Auxiliary play
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 215 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
216
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
■Pandora® commands*
The system accepts these commands while
the Pandora® is playing.
•Pandora play
•Pandora skip forward
•Pandora station up
•Pandora station down
•Pandora pause
•Pandora resume
•Pandora thumbs up
•Pandora thumbs down
■AhaTM Radio commands
The system accepts these commands while
the AhaTM is playing.
•Aha radio play
•Aha radio skip forward
•Aha radio skip back
•Aha radio station up
•Aha radio station down
•Aha radio resume
•Aha radio pause
•Aha radio like
•Aha radio dislike
■Internet service commands*
•Internet service play
•Internet service skip forward*1
•Internet service skip back*1
•Internet service station up*1
•Internet service station down*1
•Internet service resume*1
•Internet service pause*1
•Internet service like*1
•Internet service dislike*1
*1: The system accepts these commands
while the Internet service is playing.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 216 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
217
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
In keyboard screen, letters can be selected
by saying each individual letter or by saying
a keyword phrase. These keyword phrases
are:
■Keyboard Entry Commands ■Letters
Say . . . Or say . . .
AApple/Alpha
BBoy/Bravo
CCharlie
DDog/Delta
E Edward/Echo
FFrank/Foxtrot
GGeorge/Golf
HHenry/Hotel
IIgloo/India
JJohn/Juliet
KKing/Kilo
LLarry/Lima
MMary/Mike
NNancy/November
OOscar
PPaul/Papa
QQueen/Quebec
RRobert/Romeo
S Sam/Sierra
TTom/Tango
UUncle/Uniform
VVictor
WWilliam/Whiskey
XX-ray
YYellow/Yankee
ZZebra/Zulu
■Numbers
Number . . . Or say . . .
0Zero
1One
2Two
3Three
4Four
5Five
6Six
7Seven
8Eight
9Nine
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 217 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
218
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
■Symbols
Symbol . . . Or say . . .
-Hyphen
!Exclamation point
“Double Quote
#Pound
$Dollar
%Percent
&Ampersand
‘Apostrophe
(Open Parenthesis
)Close Parenthesis
~ Tilde
/Slash
<Less than
>Greater than
{Open Brace
}Close Brace
■Accented letters
Symbol . . . Or say . . .
ÀA grave
ÂA circumflex
ÄA umlaut
ÇC cedilla
ÈE grave
ÉE acute
ÊE circumflex
ËE umlaut
ÌI grave
ÎI circumflex
ÏI umlaut
ÔO circumflex
ÙU grave
ÛU circumflex
ÜU umlaut
■Punctuation marks
Symbol . . . Or say . . .
@At Sign
^Caret
*Asterisk
_Underscore
`Back Quote
,Comma
.Dot
?Question mark
:Colon
;Semicolon
+Plus
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 218 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
219
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
Models with HD RadioTM feature
iPod/iPhone
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 219 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
220
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
.
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store the station.
3. Press and hold for a few seconds.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Change the display to the preset screen.
3. Select and hold the preset number you want to store that station.
■Preset Memory
1Playing AM/FM Radio
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice
commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 195
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the Audio
menu screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and
"Arc" logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
Models with HD RadioTM feature
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 220 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 221
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Move or to select the Station List
tab.
2. Rotate to select the station, then press
.
■Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select Refresh Station List, then press .
■Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
iTunes Tagging
“iTunes” in “iTunes Tagging” is a trademark of Apple Inc.
When an HD RadioTM station is selected, the HD
indicator appears on the audio/information screen
and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
If you want to have the information on the song
played from the HD RadioTM station, select TAG in On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM or select Tag Song in
the menu with Interface dial.
If iPod/iPhone is connected, the tag is transferred to the
connected device immediately, otherwise the tag will be
transferred when the device will be connected and
select Tag Song in the menu with Interface dial.
Models with HD RadioTM feature
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 221 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
222
Features
■Radio text
Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
■Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
2Playing AM/FM Radio P. 219
To turn off scan, select Stop Scan.
■Tag song to device
You can store the TAG information in the connected iPod/iPhone.
If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in
the audio unit temporarily, then once the device is connected to the system, data is
transferred to the iPod/iPhone.
To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone, or the audio system:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Tag Song, then press .
3. Select the song you want to save the information.
1Radio text
The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Models with HD RadioTM feature
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 222 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
■Tagged song list
Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Tagged Song List, then press .
■HD subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select HD Subchannel, then press .
3. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .
Select the or when the subchannel number is displayed.
You can also select the channel by the following procedure.
1. Select More.
2. Select HD Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 223 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
224
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 224 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 225
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features
1. Select the SiriusXM® mode.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 195
2On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM P. 197
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Channel List, then press .
4. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .
2. Select a channel using the , , , icons on the tune mode screen or
the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.
To change the tune mode:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select XM Tune Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press .
1. Select More.
2. Select XM Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
■To Play the SiriusXM® Radio
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can control the SiriusXM® radio using voice
commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 225 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
226
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
.
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store the station.
3. Press and hold for a few seconds.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Change the display to the preset screen.
3. Select and hold the preset number you want to store that station.
■Preset Memory
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can store 12 SiriusXM® stations into the preset
memory.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 226 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 227 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
228
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a file from the Music Search list.
You can also select a file by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate or press to display the song
list.
2. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a file from the list.
■How to Select a File from the Music Search List
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA and AAC files protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•When you change the audio mode to CD.
•When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
You can control a CD audio using voice commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
Folder Selection
File Selection
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 228 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
229
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2Playing a CD P. 227
2. Select a mode.
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2Playing a CD P. 227
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Random/Repeat is selected.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 229 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Features
Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have
been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play
the tracks using various search methods.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 230 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Features
The songs on music CDs are automatically recorded by factory default to the HDD
the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press .
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Rec to HDD, then press .
■Recording a Music CD to HDD
1Recording a Music CD to HDD
You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can
mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on
the HDD.
2Editing an Album or Playlist P. 234
2Editing Track Information P. 237
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned
off while recording a CD, there may be pauses
between songs when you play back from the HDD.
Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available
during recording.
You can play music from other sources (e.g.,
SiriusXM®, HDD, etc.) while recording.
Please note that there is no compensation offered in
the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or
the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
Clearing the HDD
Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
2Deleting all HDD Data P. 290
■Stop Recording
■Recording a CD Manually
Album AAA
Artist AAA
10
01’23”
Track AAA01
Recording Indicator
Recording
Ready to record
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 231 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
232
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a track from the Music Search list.
uTitle information is displayed if found in
the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database) stored on the HDD.
uThe HDD has two types of playlists:
original playlists and user playlists. An
original playlist is automatically created
for each album when a music CD is
recorded. You can customize up to six
user playlists provided on the HDD by
adding tracks from your original playlists.
You can also select a track by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate or press to display the song
list.
2. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a track from the list.
■How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
You can control the HDD audio using voice
commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
2Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 244
Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded
onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed
using ultra-efficient compression technology;
therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the
original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and
cannot be recovered.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the display.
2Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio P. 257
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 232 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 233
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
P. 230
2. Select a mode.
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio P. 230
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first track in each album.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on HDD.
Random/Repeat
The following menu items vary depending on the
category you selected by the Music Search list.
Repeat Artist: Repeats all tracks in the current artist.
Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current
album.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.
Random in Artist: Plays all tracks in the current artist
in random order.
Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current
album in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.
Random/Repeat is selected.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 233 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
234
Features
Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current
playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
■Editing an album
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Albums, then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select an album that you want
to edit or delete, then press .
5. To edit an album name:
Rotate to select Edit Name, then press
.
uEnter the name using the interface dial or
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
To delete an album:
Rotate to select Delete, then press .
To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate to select List Tracks, then press
.
2Editing Track Information P. 237
■Editing an Album or Playlist
1Editing an Album or Playlist
The maximum number of songs in each of the six
user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites
the oldest songs.
The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with
a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.
Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding
a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist
will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the
album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a
user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.
The folder retains the playlist name and artist
information.
Select to enter symbols.
Icon
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 234 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
235
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Continued
Features
■Editing a playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Playlists, then press
.
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select a playlist that you want
to edit or delete, then press .
5. To edit a playlist name:
Rotate to select Edit Name, then press
.
uEnter the name using the interface dial or
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
To delete a playlist:
Rotate to select Delete, then press .
To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate to select List Tracks, then press
.
2Editing Track Information P. 237
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 235 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
236
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Features
■Creating a new playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Playlists, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Create New Playlist,
then press .
uEnter the name using the interface dial or
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM,
then select tracks from the Music
Search list.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 236 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Continued
Features
Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Tracks, then press .
4. Rotate to select a track you want to edit
or delete, then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. To edit track information:
Rotate to select Edit Name, then press
.
uEnter the track name, track artist, etc.
using the interface dial or the On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM. Move ,
rotate to select OK, then press .
To delete a track:
Rotate to select Delete, then press .
■Editing Track Information
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 237 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
238
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Features
Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing
the Gracenote® Album Info.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Albums, then press .
4. Rotate to select an album you want to
edit, then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select Edit Name, then press
.
6. Move to select Get Music Info, then
press .
uThe system starts to access the
Gracenote® Album Info.
■Displaying Music Information
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 238 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
239
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Features
Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included
with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or
connect the USB flash drive that includes
the update.
2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD
mode.
3. Move or to select the CD/HDD tab.
4. Rotate to select Update Gracenote
Album Info, then press .
5. Rotate to select Update by USB or
Update by CD, then press .
uThe system starts updating and the
confirmation message appears on the
screen. Press to finish.
■Updating Gracenote® Album Info
1Updating Gracenote® Album Info
To acquire updated files:
•Consult a dealer.
•U.S.: Visit www.acura.com.
•Canada: Visit www.acura.ca.
Once you perform an update, any information you
edited before will be overwritten or erased.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 239 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
240
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2USB Port P. 193
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 240 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 241
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select albums in the category you selected by the Music Search list.
1. Select the album bar.
uThe image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
uWhen the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.
■How to Select an Album
1How to Select an Album
This function may not be available depending on
models or versions.
Select to go back to the previous screen.
X
Select an album
image.
Select the album
bar.
Album Bar Album Image
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 241 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
242
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a song from the Music Search list.
You can also select a song by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate or press to display the song
list.
2. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a song from the list.
■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
You can control an iPod using voice commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
2Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 244
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 258
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 242 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
243
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select Shuffle or Repeat.
2Playing an iPod P. 240
2. Select a mode.
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select Shuffle or Repeat.
2Playing an iPod P. 240
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 243 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
244
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod using voice commands.
■To enable SBV
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate to select Song by Voice, then
press .
5. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options:
•On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands
are available.
•Off: Disable the feature.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 244 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 245
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features
■Searching for music using SBV
1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
HDD and iPod.
3. Press the button and say a command.
uExample 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
uExample 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.
1Searching for music using SBV
Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2Song By VoiceTM commands P. 213
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the HDD or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2Phonetic Modification P. 246
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 245 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
246
Features
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the HDD or iPod.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings,
then press .
3. Move or to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate to select Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification, then press .
5. Move and rotate to select New
Modification, then press .
6. Rotate to select HDD or iPod, then
press .
■Phonetic Modification
1Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 246 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features
7. Rotate to select the item to modify
(e.g., Artist), then press .
uThe list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
8. Rotate to select an entry (e.g., No
Name), then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
uThe listen to the current phonetic
modification, rotate to select Play,
then press .
uTo delete the current phonetic
modification, rotate to select
Delete, then press .
9. Rotate to select Modify, then press
.
10. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to
use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.
11. Move to select OK to exit.
uThe artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the (Talk)
button and use the voice command
“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the
artist “No Name.”
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 247 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
248
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Select Audio Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
Compatible phones only
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
iPhone
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 248 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
■Operating a menu item
The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate to select an item and press .
To select Change Source or Sound, press the
MENU button, then press .
■Pandora® Menu
•Skip Forward •Bookmark Track
•Play/Pause •Bookmark Artist
•Station List •Change Source
•Like •Sound
•Dislike
U.S. models
1Playing Internet Radio
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call
1-888-528-7876.
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora
®
through the audio system,
it may be streaming through
Bluetooth
®
Audio. Make sure
Pandora
®
mode on your audio system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
You can control Pandora® using voice commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2Pandora® P. 259
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 249 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
250
Features
You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
■Operating a menu item
The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate to select an item and press .
To select Sound, Change Source or
Stations, press the MENU button, then press
.
■AhaTM Radio Menu
•Like •View text
•Dislike •View list
•Play/Pause •Reply
•15sec Back •Change Source
•30sec Skip •Stations
•Sound
1AhaTM Radio Menu
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
You can control AhaTM Radio using voice commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2AhaTM Radio P. 260
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the AcuraLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.acura.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 250 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
251
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2USB Port P. 193
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 251 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
252
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a file from the Music Search list.
You can also select a file by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate or press to display the song
list.
2. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a file from the list.
■How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
You can control a USB flash drive using voice
commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 261
Files in WMA/AAC format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 258
Folder Selection
File Selection
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 252 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 251
2. Select a mode.
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 251
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Random/Repeat is selected.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 253 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
254
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2Phone Setup P. 299
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1-
888-528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice
commands.
2Voice Control Operation P. 211
Bluetooth® Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Play Icon
Pause Icon More
Select to display
the menu items.
Audio Source
Select to change
an audio source.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on and
off.
Interface Dial/
ENTER Button
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.
Move up, down,
right and left to
select secondary
menu.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select or
to change files.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select or to
change folders.
On Demand Multi-
Use DisplayTM
VOL (Volume) Knob
(Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Audio/Information
Screen
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 254 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■To pause or resume a file
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .
Select the play icon or pause icon.
Press the (pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 293
Press the (hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone. This function may not be available
on some phones.
■Switching to HFL
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1Switching to HFL
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
Button
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 255 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
256
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause Solution
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported ●Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject Mechanical error
●Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2Protecting CDs P. 263
●If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
the disc.
●Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
●If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Mecha Error
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Servo error
Check Disc Disc error ●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2Protecting CDs P. 263
Heat Error High temperature ●Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 256 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
257
uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Features
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
HDD access error.
Please consult your dealer. —
The display system temperature is too high. For protection,
the system will shut off until the display cools down.
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
The navigation system temperature is too low. For
protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.
The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the
temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation
system starts up automatically when the display warms up.
Unplayable File Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be
skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 257 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
258
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is compatible with the
audio system.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Version Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 258 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
259
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No stations have been created.
Please create a station on the device.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.
Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may
skip each hour.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
predetermined number of times in an hour.
Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip
Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.
No data Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
PANDORA Unsupported Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.
PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.
Cannot connect to PANDORA. When stopped, make sure
PANDORA is running on the phone. For iPhone, set
connection priority to USB and reconnect.
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your
device.
U.S. models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 259 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
260
uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM Radio
Features
AhaTM Radio
If an error occurs while playing AhaTM Radio, you may see the following error
messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
Cannot connect to aha. When stopped, make sure aha is
running on the phone. For iPhone, set connection priority to
USB and reconnect.
Appears when the AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.
Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 260 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
261
Features
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the interface dial until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the
SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by pressing the SOURCE button repeatedly or
operating the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.
Loading:
SiriusXM® is loading the audio or program information.
Ch off air:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Ch unauthorized:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
No signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Ch unavailable:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
Check antenna:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
■Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
■Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
■SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
•U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or
(800) 852-9696
•Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
(877) 209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
•In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
•In tunnels
•On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
•Large items carried on the roof rack
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 261 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
262
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Features
Recommended CDs
•Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
•Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
•Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
■CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
Also includes:
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 262 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
263
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
Features
■Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
•Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
•When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
•Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
•Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
•Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
•Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
•Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
●Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 263 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
264
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
•Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
•Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
•Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) launch in 2012
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5
■USB Flash Drives
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 264 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
265
Continued
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■How to customize
Select your desired setting item by pressing the SETTINGS button, then rotating
while the power mode is ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Press .
1Customized Features
When you customize setting, make sure that the
vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P.
To customize other features, rotate , move , ,
or , and press .
2List of customizable options P. 275
SETTINGS Button
Audio/Information Screen
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 265 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
266
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■Customization flow
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 266 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
267
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 267 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
268
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 268 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
269
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 269 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
270
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 270 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
271
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 271 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
272
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 272 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
273
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 273 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
274
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 274 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
275
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Settings
Display
Sync Display Brightness Selects whether the display brightness synchronizes
with the instrument panel brightness. On*1/Off
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen. —
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen. —
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen. —
Sound/
Beep
Guidance Volume Changes the volume of the audio speakers. —
Interface Dial Feedback Sets if and when the system reads aloud a
selection made using the Interface Dial. On*1/Off/Auto
Message Auto Reading Selects whether the system automatically reads
out messages, and, if selected, whether only
when driving. On/Off/Auto*1
Verbal Reminder Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On*1/Off
Blue-
tooth
Bluetooth Status Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and creates a security PIN.
2Phone Setup P. 299
—
Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code.
2To change the pairing code setting P. 301 Random/Fixed*1
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 275 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
276
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Settings
Voice
Reco
Guidance Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. —
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off
Song by Voice Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.
2Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 244 On*1/Off
Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for music stored in
the HDD or an iPod.
2Phonetic Modification P. 246
—
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
2Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 314 —
Opening Sound Volume
Changes the volume of the system’s startup sound.
—
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper
●Changes the wallpaper type.
●Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
●Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2Wallpaper Setup P. 207
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic
Clock Adjustment Adjusts Clock.
2Clock P. 114 —
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
Auto Time Zone*Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock when driving through different time zones. On*1/Off
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 276 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
277
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Settings
Clock
Auto Daylight*
Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one
hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.
On*1/Off
Clock Reset Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group. —
Others
Units*Changes the distance unit on the navigation map
screen.
miles*1/km (U.S.)
miles/km*1 (Canada)
Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/
Spanish
Voice Command Tips
Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only
voice commands are available.
On*1/Off
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the On Demand Multi-
Use DisplayTM.
Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On/Off*1
System Device Information Displays the system/device information. —
Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2Defaulting All the Settings P. 289 —
Default Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default. Default/OK
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 277 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
278
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
Forward Collision Warning
Distance
Changes at which distance FCW* or CMBSTM*
alerts, or turns FCW* on and off.
Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep*
Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
the ACC with LSF range.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit*Changes the speed unit for ACC with LSF on the
multi-information display.
mph*1/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h*1
(Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation
Setting*
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal*1/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep*
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended. On/Off*1
Blind Spot Info*Changes the setting for the blind spot
information.
Audible And Visual
Alert*1/Visual Alert/
Off
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 278 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
279
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language on the multi-
information display.
English*1/French/
Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
elapsed time A.
When Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B.
When Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset*1
Turn by Turn Display Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes
on during the route guidance. On*1/Off
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 279 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
280
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Driving
Position
Setup
Memory Position Link
Turns the driving position memory system on and off.
On*1/Off
Auto Tilt & Telescopic Moves the steering wheel fully up when you get
in/get out of the vehicle. On*1/Off
Auto Seatbelt Tension*Turns the auto seatbelt tension setting for the
seat belt e-pretensioner on and off. On*1/Off
Keyless
Access
Setup
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors. On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/
lock the doors. On*1/Off
Remote Start System On/
Off*Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60seconds
/
30seconds
*1/
15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
60seconds
/
30seconds
/
15seconds
*1/
0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.
Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 280 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
281
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Door
Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door*1/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.
90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1
Auto Folding Door Mirror*Changes how you can fold the door mirrors.
Auto Fold With
Keyless
*1
/
Manual Only
Wiper
Setup
Wiper Action*Changes the setting for the automatic
intermittent wipers in the AUTO position.
Rain Sensing*1/
Intermittent/Speed
Sensitive
Front Wiper Action*Changes the setting for the wipers in the INT
position.
Speed Sensitive*1/
Intermittent
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 281 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
282
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Settings
Mainte-
nance
Info.
Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service. —
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default. Default/OK
Camera
Settings
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default. Default/OK
Camera
Settings
Rear
Camera
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default. Default/OK
Cross Traffic Monitor Turns the cross traffic monitor feature on and off. On*1/Off
Models with
multi-view
rear camera
Models with
multi-view
rear camera
and cross
traffic
monitor
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 282 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
283
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Settings
MVCS
Guidelines
Fixed
Guideline
Sets whether to turn on the reference line
display. On*1/Off
Dynamic
Guideline
Sets whether to turn on the projection line
display. On*1/Off
Preferences
Automatically
show camera
after reverse
Sets the rear view to be automatically switched to
the front view when the shift lever is moved out
of (R.
On*1/Off
Default
camera mode
in forward
Selects which screen to display when the
surround view camera system is turned on while
the vehicle is moving forward.
Front Ground
View*1/Last Used/
Front Blind View/
Side View
Default
camera mode
in reverse
Sets which screen to display when the surround
view camera system is turned on while the vehicle
is reversing.
Rear Ground View*1/
Last Used/Rear
View/Rear Wide
View
Models with
surround view
camera system
(MVCS)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 283 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
284
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Settings
MVCS
Preferences
Show camera
when
decelerating
Sets the screen to automatically return to the
camera view at vehicle speeds of 7 mph (12 km/
h) or lower. The screen can return only when the
display has been switched to the audio/
information screen at the vehicle speed of over 9
mph (15 km/h).
On*1/Off
Clear parking
guidance
automatically
Turns the parking guide lines on and off. On*1/Off
Display Adjusts the screen’s preferences. —
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default. Default/OK
Cross Traffic Monitor Turns the cross traffic monitor feature on and off. On*1/Off
Models with
surround view
camera system
(MVCS)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 284 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
285
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
Settings
CD/HDD
Recording from CD
Selects whether the songs on music CDs are
automatically recorded to the HDD. Auto*1/Manual
Recording Quality
Selects the quality of the music files recorded
to the HDD. Standard*1/High
HDD Info Displays the HDD capacity. —
Update Gracenote Album
Info
Updates the Gracenote® Album Info
(Gracenote® Media Database).
Update by USB*1/
Update by CD
Delete All HDD Data 2Deleting all HDD Data P. 290 —
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Device List
Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device
paired to HFL. —
Connect Bluetooth Audio
Device
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL. —
CD mode
CD mode
HDD mode
CD or HDD mode
HDD mode
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora®* or
AhaTM mode
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora®* or
AhaTM mode
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 285 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
286
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
Settings
Other
Source Select Popup
Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when the AUDIO button is
pressed.
On/Off*1
HD Radio Mode*
Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives the
analogue waves only.
Auto*1/Analog
Cover Art
Turns on and off the cover art display. On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default. Default/OK
Phone
Settings Phone
Connect phone
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.
2Phone Setup P. 299
—
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
2Phone Setup P. 299
—
Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2Phone Setup P. 299 —
AM/FM mode
CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod, USB,
Pandora®* or AhaTM mode
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 286 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
287
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Settings
Phone
Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. On*1/Off
Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds. On/Off*1
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off
Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On*1/Off
Use Contact Photo Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen. On*1/Off
Text/
Email
Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off. On*1/Off
Select Account Selects a text/e-mail message account. —
New Text/Email Alert
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.
On/Off*1
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default. Default/OK
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 287 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
288
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Info
Settings
Acura
Link
AcuraLink Msg Notice Selects whether newly received AcuraLink
messages to be displayed. On*1/Off
Delete AcuraLink Message Deletes AcuraLink messages. —
AcuraLink Subscription Status
Displays your current AcuraLink subscription status. —
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock
See System Settings on P. 275 to P. 277.
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone*
Auto Daylight*
Clock Reset
Other Info Screen Preference
Selects the top menu when the INFO button is
pressed.
●Info Top- A brief menu pops up.
●Info Menu- A full menu pops up.
●Off- A menu does not pop up.
Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default. Default/OK
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 288 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
289
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
You can reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Others tab.
4. Rotate to select Factory Data Reset,
then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
uThe confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Press to select OK.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
•Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search
Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
•Route Preference
•Audio preset settings
•Phonebook entries
•Other display and each item settings.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 289 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
290
uuCustomized FeaturesuDeleting all HDD Data
Features
Deleting all HDD Data
You can reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the
HDD.
1. Turn on the audio system and select the
HDD mode.
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press .
4. Move or to select the CD/HDD tab.
5. Rotate to select Delete all HDD Data,
then press .
uThe confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 290 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
291
Continued
Features
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s
path.
Training HomeLink
If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
•Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
•If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
■Important Safety Precautions
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Red Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 291 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuHomeLink® Universal TransceiveruTraining HomeLink
292
Features
■Training a Button
1Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and
follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”
Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.
Standard transmitter
Indicator blinks rapidly for
2 secs, then remains on for
about 23 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
4.
a.
3.
2.
5. a.
b.
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
blink after 10 secs?
Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?
Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Does the LED blink within 20 secs?
Training
Complete
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete
The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
HomeLink LED
is on.
YES NO
YES
YES NO NO
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 292 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
293
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Speed Dial/Call History on the multi-
information display or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, to cancel a command or to clear
the phone information on the multi-information display.
(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Interface dial: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . Move ,
, or to select secondary menu.
■HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1-
888-528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.
2Customized Features P. 265
Voice control tips:
•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up
Button
Volume down
Interface
Dial
PHONE
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 293 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
294
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2Speed Dial P. 311
■HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2Customized Features P. 265
■Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth® Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level
Status
Roam Status
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Disabled Option
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 294 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
295
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
■Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
Edit the user name of a paired phone.
Phone
Edit Device
Name
Connect
Phone*1
Bluetooth
Device List
(Existing
entry list)*1
Replace This
Device
Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
*1: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.
Disconnect
(Existing entry list)
Pair a phone to the system.
Edit PIN
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.
Delete This
Device Delete a previously paired phone.
Add Bluetooth
Device Pair a phone to the system.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 295 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
296
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Select a text/e-mail message account.
Text/Email*1
Manual Input
Edit Speed
Dial*1 New Entry
Import from
Call History
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Import from
Phonebook
Delete All Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Edit
Delete
(Existing
entry list)
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●Change a number.
●Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.
Use Contact Photo
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
Automatic Phone Sync
*1
Select Account
Enable Text/Email Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
New Text/Email Alert Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new
text/e-mail message.
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Default
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 296 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
297
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Speed Dial*1
Manual Input
New Entry Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
More Speed Dials Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Phonebook*1
Dial*1
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Enter a phone number to dial.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 297 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
298
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Text/Email*1
Message is
read aloud.
See the previous message.
(Read/Stop)
Previous
Next See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or stop message
from being read.
Reply
Call
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
Select Account
Select a message
and press .
Select a mail or text message account.
Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Call History*1
All
Dialed
Received
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.
Roadside Assistance*1 Makes a call to the number for the Roadside Assistance service.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 298 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 299
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
uHFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
uIf your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
uIf your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
■Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•Up to six phones can be paired.
•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 310
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 299 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
300
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
uHFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
uIf your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
uIf your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
7. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 300 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 301
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Bluetooth tab.
4. Rotate to select Edit Pairing Code,
then press .
5. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 301 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
302
Features
■To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
6. Rotate to select Replace This Device,
then press .
7. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
uFollow the prompts to pair a new phone.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, and security PIN information from the
previously paired phone.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 302 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
303
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■To delete a paired phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
6. Rotate to select Delete This Device,
then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 303 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
304
Features
■To turn on or off the text/e-mail
message function
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate to select Enable Text/Email,
then press .
uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■To turn on or off the text/e-mail
message notice
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate to select New Text/Email
Alert, then press .
uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message Options
1To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message Options
To use the text/e-mail message function, you need a
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special
feature capabilities:
•U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1-
888-528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 304 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 305
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To set up the auto reading option
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Sound/Beep
tab.
4. Rotate to select Message Auto
Reading, then press .
uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto, then
press .
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text/e-mail message is always read aloud.
Off: A text/e-mail message is not read aloud.
Auto: A text/e-mail message is read aloud only when
driving.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 305 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
306
Features
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
6. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .
7. Enter a new four-digit number.
u
Rotate to select, then press .
Move to delete. Rotate to select
OK to enter the security PIN.
u
You can also enter a number using the
icons.
8. Re-enter the four-digit number.
uThe screen returns to the screen in step
4.
■To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
Audio/information screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Audio/information screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 306 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 307
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Edit the user name of a paired phone as
follows:
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to
edit, then press .
6. Rotate to select Edit Device Name,
then press .
7. Enter a new name of the phone.
u
Rotate to select, then press .
Move to delete. Rotate or move
to select OK then press to enter the
name.
u
You can also enter a name using the
icons.
■Editing User Name
1Editing User Name
Select to enter symbols.
Audio/information screen
Icon
Audio/information screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Audio/information screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 307 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
308
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Auto Transfer, then
press .
5. Rotate to select On, then press .
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Auto Answer, then
press .
5. Rotate to select On, then press .
■Automatic Transferring
■Auto Answer
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 308 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 309
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Ring Tone, then press
.
5. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
You can display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Use Contact Photo,
then press .
5. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
■Use Contact Photo
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 309 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
310
Features
■When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.
■Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Automatic Phone
Sync, then press .
5. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Message
Voice
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 310 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 311
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
uRepeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
4. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
uSelect a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
uInput the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
uSelect a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Rotate to
select Yes or No, then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
■Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 311 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
312
Features
■To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
6. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.
uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Record, then press .
7. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 312 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
313
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■To delete a voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
6. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.
uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Clear, then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
■To delete a speed dial
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Delete, then press .
6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 313 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
314
Features
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■To add a new voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press
.
■Phonebook Phonetic Modification
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 314 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
315
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
6. Rotate to select New Voice Tag, then
press .
7. Move or and rotate to select a
contact name, then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate to select Modify, then press .
9. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
10.You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate to select OK, then
press .
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 315 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
316
Features
■To modify a voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press
.
6. Rotate to select a contact name you
want to modify, then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate to select Modify, then press .
8. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
9. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select OK, then
press .
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the
currently connected phone.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 316 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
317
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■To delete a modified voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
6. Rotate to select a contact name you
want to delete, then press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
8. Move and rotate to select OK, then
press .
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 317 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
318
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To delete all modified voice tags
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
uThe contact name list appears.
6. Move and rotate to select Delete All,
then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 318 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 319
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
■Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say “Call” and the voice tag
name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or
“Call” and the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 319 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
320
Features
■To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press .
4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Move to Search.
uYou can use the keyboard on the touch
screen for an alphabetical search.
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 294
2Speed Dial P. 311
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand Multi-
Use DisplayTM for an alphabetical search.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 320 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 321
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
5. Rotate to select , then press .
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 294
2Speed Dial P. 311
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand Multi-
Use DisplayTM to input numbers.
Select numbers, then to start dialing.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 321 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
322
Features
■To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Call History, then
press .
4. Move or to select All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
1. Press the button.
2. Move the left selector wheel right to select
Call History.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to select a
number.
4. Push the left selector wheel or the
button.
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
These icons next to the number indicate the
following:
: Dialed calls.
: Received calls.
: Missed calls.
The call history displays the last 12 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
Steering switches
111AAA####
Mr.AAA
Mr.BBB
On multi-information display
Steering switches
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 322 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 323
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
1. Press the button.
2. Move the left selector wheel left to select
Speed Dial.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to select a
number.
4. Push the left selector wheel or the
button.
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another
paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call
from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2Speed Dial P. 311
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
The speed dial displays the 20 speed dial entries.
Steering switches
111AAA####
Mr.AAA
Mr.BBB
On multi-information display
Steering switches
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 323 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
324
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the On Demand Multi-
Use DisplayTM instead of the and buttons.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 324 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 325
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
The available options are shown on the Phone
screen.
Rotate to select the option, then press .
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the On Demand Multi-
Use DisplayTM.
0123456789#### 01’23
John
10
Mute Icon
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 325 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
326
Features
HFL can display newly received text/e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text/e-mail message.
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
uThe text/e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.
■Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text/e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text/e-mail message for the first
time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked
to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2To turn on or off the text/e-mail message
notice P. 304
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 326 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 327
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move or to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate to select Select Account, then
press .
5. Rotate to select Text Messages or an
e-mail account you want, then press .
■Selecting a Mail Account
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Move to select Select Account, then press .
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 327 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
328
Features
■Displaying text messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press
.
uSelect account if necessary.
4. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
To see the previous or next message, move or
on the text message screen.
Message List
Text Message
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 328 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 329
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■Displaying e-mail messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a folder, then press .
5. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
uThe e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.
1Displaying e-mail messages
Received text/e-mail messages may appear in the
message list screen at the same time. In this case, text
messages are titled No subject.
Folder List
Message List
E-mail
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 329 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
330
Features
■Read or stop reading a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
uThe system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2Displaying Messages P. 328
2. Press to stop reading.
Press again to start reading the message
from the beginning.
■Reply to a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
uThe system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2Displaying Messages P. 328
2. Move and rotate to select Reply,
then press .
3. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press .
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
uMessage sent appears on the screen
when the reply message was successfully
sent.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•Talk to you later, I’m driving.
•I’m on my way.
•I’m running late.
•OK
•Yes
•No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 330 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
331
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
uThe system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2Displaying text messages P. 328
2. Move and rotate to select Call, then
press .
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 331 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
332
Features
Provides a nationwide service for unexpected incidents. You can call for assistance
using a phone paired and connected to Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
1. From the Phone screen, press the MENU
button.
2. Rotate to select Roadside Assistance,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone number, then
press .
uDialing starts automatically.
■Roadside Assistance*
1Roadside Assistance*
If you are subscribed to a paid AcuraLink package,
you can call the roadside assistance using the LINK
button instead of your phone.
2AcuraLink® P. 333
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 332 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
333
Continued
Features
AcuraLink®
Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice
communication in case of emergency, online security, one-on-one operator
assistance, and the transmission of important messages regarding your vehicle’s
status.
For information on traffic rerouting and traffic information updates, provided by the
AcuraLink server, see the Navigation System Manual.
■Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the AcuraLink operator. Once
connected, information about your vehicle, its
positioning, and its condition will be sent to
the operator; you also can speak to the
operator when connected.
■In Case of Emergency
1AcuraLink®
AcuraLink also provides services you can operate
from the Internet or your smartphone.
To subscribe to AcuraLink, or to get more
information about all of its features, contact an Acura
dealer, or visit owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or
www.acura.ca (in Canada).
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator
if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected or you
do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use emergency services when:
•
You travel outside the AcuraLink service coverage areas.
•There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the ASSIST button, microphone, speakers,
or the unit itself.
•You are not subscribed to the service or your
subscription is no longer valid.
You cannot operate other navigation- or phone-
related functions using the screens while talking to
the operator.
Only the operator can terminate the connection to
your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
When connected to the AcuraLink
operator:
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Audio/information screen
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 333 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
334
Features
■Manual operator connection
If you need to talk to the AcuraLink operator
in an emergency situation, you can manually
connect to them by pressing the ASSIST
button with the power mode in ACCESSORY
or ON.
1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling
console.
2. Press the ASSIST button.
uYou are connected to the AcuraLink
operator.
1Manual operator connection
Do not press the button while driving. When you
need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a
safe place.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
In an emergency, the cover can be broken through to
press the ASSIST button.
ASSIST
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 334 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 335
uuAcuraLink®u
Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicle’s location,
remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle.
To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number
(PIN).
■Stolen vehicle tracking
This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move.
If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the
provider.
■Remote door lock/unlock
The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.
■Vehicle finder
This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas,
such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the
remote transmitter’s answerback function, you can contact the provider which can
then flash your vehicle’s exterior lights and sound the horn.
■Security alarm notification
If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as
someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.
■Security Features
1Security Features
The contact information of your provider, your user
ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to
AcuraLink. If you forget any of the above, contact a
dealer, or go to owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or
www.acura.ca (in Canada).
You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock
and vehicle finder features from the Internet or using
your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit
owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or www.acura.ca (in
Canada) for details.
1Vehicle finder
The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop
sounding under the following conditions:
•When 30 seconds have elapsed.
•You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter.
•You unlock the doors using the keyless access
system.
•You unlock the doors using the built-in key.
•The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 335 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
336
Features
Connect to the AcuraLink operator when trying to find a destination or for roadside
assistance.
1. Press the LINK button.
uConnection to the operator begins.
2. Talk to the operator.
uTo disconnect, press the selector knob,
select End Call on the On Demand
Multi-Use DisplayTM, or press the Hang-
up button.
■Operator Assistance
1Operator Assistance
Remain attentive to road conditions and driving
during operator assistance.
LINK Button
Audio/information screen
when connected to the
AcuraLink operator.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 336 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 337
uuAcuraLink®u
Features
AcuraLink sends you messages on vehicle
features, safety and emissions recall
campaigns, maintenance reminders (U.S.
models only), and diagnostic information.
When you receive a new message, an icon
appears on the audio/information screen.
■Message category
There are six message categories.
•Feature Guide: Appears for the first 90 days of ownership, introducing vehicle
features each day.
•Quick Tips: Supplements your Owner’s Manual with updated vehicle
information.
•Diagnostic Info: Appears when a warning indicator or message comes on.
Rotate to select Check Later or Check Now.
uSelecting Check Now lets you know if you should see a dealer immediately or
later in accordance with the warning severity level.
•Scheduled Dealer Appointment (U.S. models only): An appointment made
through the Acura server or Acura Owners website can be rescheduled or
canceled from this option. 2 P. 339
•Maintenance Minder (U.S. models only): Lets you know which maintenance
item is due along with a reminder message.
•Recalls/Campaigns: Reminds you of a recall or important safety information.
You should also be notified by mail.
■AcuraLink Message
1AcuraLink Message
Messages may not appear immediately after your
vehicle purchase. It can take several days for your
dealer to register your vehicle’s ID.
If an icon includes an exclamation point, it indicates
that Acura gives high priority to this message
compared to the one without.
•: An unread message with high priority
•: An unread message
Message Icon
1Message category
Message categories can be added, edited, or deleted
through broadcast messages from Acura.
You can call your dealer, find the nearest dealer, or
schedule appointments (U.S. models only) from the
message options in Maintenance Minder (U.S.
models only), Recalls/Campaigns, and Diagnostic
Info.
2Message Options P. 338
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 337 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
338
Features
■Reading a message
1. Press the INFO button, rotate to select
AcuraLink/Messages, then press .
uIf your display has changed from Info
menu to Current Drive, press the
MENU button.
uAcuraLink messages appears.
2. Rotate to select a category, then press
.
uIf there are unread messages in a
category, a message icon appears next to
that category.
3. Rotate to select a message you want to
read, then press .
■Message Options
While a message is displayed, you can use
options to take immediate action to the
message.
Available options are:
•Voice: Reads the message aloud. Select Stop to cancel it.
•Find Acura Dlr.: Searches for the nearest Acura dealer.
•Delete: Deletes the displayed message. Rotate to select this option, then
press .
•Call Your Dealer: Calls your Acura dealer using HFL.
1Reading a message
If there is no message listed on the menu,
AcuraLink/Messages is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
The message icon disappears once you read the
message.
However, the exclamation mark that indicates that
the message has a high priority remains.
•: A read message with high priority.
1Message Options
The available options vary by message category.
You can delete all messages in a category at once.
2Customized Features P. 265
Voice is available only when the Message Auto
Reading setting is in ON, and the language selected
is English.
2Customized Features P. 265
Dec. 31, 2011
The engine may not be operating properly.
Select VOICE FOR DETAILS.
Engine System. P062F
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 338 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
339
uuAcuraLink®u
Features
•Schedule Dealer Appointment (U.S. models only): Automatically sets an
appointment date at your dealer.
•Phone number: Dials a number displayed in the message via HFL.
•Diagnostic Info: Updates the current diagnostic message by connecting to the
Acura server using HFL.
■Dealer Appointments
You can confirm the scheduled appointment date when you receive a
Maintenance Minder or Recalls/Campaigns message, or reschedule any existing
appointments.
1. Select a Maintenance Minder, Recalls/
Campaigns, or Scheduled Dealer
Appointment message.
2. Rotate to select Scheduled Dealer
Appointment or Reschedule
Appointment (depending on the screen).
Press .
uA suggested time and date are displayed.
3. Rotate to select Confirm
Appointment. Press to accept the time
and date.
4. Press to select OK.
1Dealer Appointments
To set up an automated dealer appointment when a
regular maintenance is due, visit the Acura Owners
website at www.owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or
www.acura.ca (in Canada), and set the required
option. A reminder message will be sent as the date
for the dealer appointment approaches. A reminder
message will also be sent if you schedule an
appointment online using Acura Owners’ Schedule
Service Appointment function.
If you are not satisfied with the proposed
appointment date and time, call your dealer directly.
To cancel the scheduled appointment, select Cancel
Appointment when a message is displayed.
U.S. models only
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 339 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
340
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 340 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
341
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 342
Maximum Load Limit........................ 345
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle........................ 347
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 348
Precautions While Driving................. 353
Automatic Transmission ................... 354
Shifting............................................ 355
SPORT Mode.................................... 359
Cruise Control*................................ 360
Front Sensor Camera*...................... 363
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF)*........................ 365
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .... 378
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ....... 381
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
*
...385
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*.... 389
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
®
), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ............... 396
Agile Handling Assist System............ 398
Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®)
System ........................................... 398
Blind Spot Information (BSI) System *.... 399
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 401
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ............. 403
Braking
Brake System ....................................... 405
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............... 410
Brake Assist System ..............................411
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
*
.....412
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped .....................................420
Parking Sensor System*........................421
Cross Traffic Monitor*..........................425
Multi-View Rear Camera*.....................429
Surround View Camera System*..........430
Refueling
Fuel Information...................................440
How to Refuel ......................................441
Fuel Economy.........................................442
Improving Fuel Economy.......................442
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories...........................................443
Modifications .......................................443
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 341 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
342
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
•Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
uRemove any frost, snow, or ice.
uRemove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
uWhen removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
•Make sure the hood is securely closed.
uIf the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
•Make sure the tires are in good condition.
uCheck air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 475
•Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
uThere are blind spots from the inside.
■Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 342 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 343
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
•Store or secure all items on board properly.
uCarrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 345
•Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
uThey can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
•Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
uAn object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
•If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
uThey may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
•Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 124
•Adjust your seating position properly.
uAdjust the head restraint, too.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 156
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 159
•Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
uAdjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2Adjusting the Mirrors P. 153
2Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 152
■Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 343 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
344
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
•Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
uThey can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
•Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
•Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
uAlways have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2Indicators P. 68
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 344 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
345
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2Specifications P. 536
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2Specifications P. 536
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 345 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
346
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 346 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
347
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2Emergency Towing P. 531
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 347 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
348
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
uThe electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up the electric parking brake switch.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then
depress the brake pedal.
uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2Immobilizer System P. 131
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
Brake Pedal
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 348 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 349
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Shift to (P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1Starting the Engine
Bring the keyless access remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless
access remote is weak.
2If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak P. 514
The engine may not start if the keyless access remote
is subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
■Stopping the Engine
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 349 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
350
Driving
You can remotely start the engine using the two-way keyless access remote from
extended distances.
■To start the engine
The engine runs for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the button.
uThe amber LED blinks, then the green LED comes back on if a 10-minute
extension request was transmitted successfully.
After pressing the (lock) button, wait for the green LED to blink. This indicates that
the all the doors and the trunk are locked.
■Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
•You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the multi-information display.
•The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
•The shift lever is in a position other than (P.
•The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
•You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
•Another registered keyless access remote is in the
vehicle.
•There is any antenna failure.
•Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
3
WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you
or cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter
when the vehicle is parked in a garage
or other area with limited ventilation.
With the doors locked, Press the button,
then press and hold the button.
Amber LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.
Continues to blink
during a vehicle
self check until the
engine starts.
Go within the range,
and try again.
Green LED: Comes on while
the engine is running.
Red LED: Blinks when the
remote is out of the keyless
access system range.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 350 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 351
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
■To stop the engine
Press and hold the button
for one second.
Go within the range,
and try again.
Amber LED: Blinks when any
button is pressed.
Red LED:
●Comes on for one second to let you
know that the engine has stopped.
●Blinks when the remote is out of
the keyless access system range.
The engine will not stop.
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
•The engine oil pressure is low.
•The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
•The telematics unit malfunctions.
•The security system alarm is not set.
Before starting the engine, make sure to check the
door lock status using the remote. When you press
the button, wait for the green LED to blink. If
the red LED turns on, the doors and trunk did not
lock, and the engine does not start.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
•The air conditioning is activated in recirculation
mode.
When it is cold outside:
•The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
•The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 351 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
352
Driving
1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Put the shift lever to (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
uMake sure the electric parking brake indicator goes off.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■Hill Start Assist System
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the shift lever to (D when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then
release the brake pedal.
■Starting to Drive
1Starting to Drive
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.
When the engine was started using the two-way
keyless access remote*
When the engine was started using the two-way keyless access remote*
When the engine was started in any case
1Hill Start Assist System
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 352 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
353
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Continued
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine,
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
■In Rain
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
NOTICE
The following can damage the under spoiler:
•Parking the vehicle by a parking block
•Parallel parking along the road shoulder
•Driving toward the bottom of a hill
•Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
•Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
•Driving on a road with potholes.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the engine will shut down and all steering
and brake power assist functions will stop, making it
difficult to control the vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 353 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
354
Driving
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Automatic Transmission
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■Other Precautions
■Creeping
■Kickdown
1Precautions While Driving
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 354 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
355
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■Shift lever positions
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (-
22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for:
●Normal driving (gears change between 1st
and 6th automatically)
●Temporarily driving in the sequential shift
mode
●Driving in the sequential shift mode (when
driving in SPORT mode)
Release Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 355 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
356
Driving
■Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
When the engine speed is increased while the shift
lever is in (N, (P or (R, the fuel supply may be cut
off even without the engine speed entering the
tachometer’s red zone.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal
and press the shift lever
release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the
shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever
release button and
shift.
Tachometer’s red zone
M (Sequential Shift mode)
Indicator/Gear Position
Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 356 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
357
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your
hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift
mode.
■When the shift lever is in (D:
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position
indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will
automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.
■When the shift lever is in (D with SPORT mode:
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift)
indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or
less, the vehicle automatically shifts down into 1st gear. If you do not operate the
paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission automatically shifts up to 2nd
gear.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to 6th.
You can cancel this mode by pressing the SPORT button, or pulling the (+ paddle
shifter for a few seconds. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the sequential
shift mode indicator and shift indicator go off.
■Sequential Shift Mode
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 357 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
358
Driving
■Second gear lock mode
If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,
the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on
slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter.
■Sequential Shift Mode Operation
1Sequential Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
To change gears continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.
If the gear position indicator blinks when you try to
shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not
in its allowable gear range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
In sport mode, to prioritize the engine performance
enhancement, the transmission may not allow for
shifting up while the engine speed is low.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1st to 2nd 17 mph (28 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 27 mph (44 km/h)
3rd to 4th 36 mph (57 km/h)
4th to 5th 41 mph (66 km/h)
5th to 6th 44 mph (71 km/h)
Downshifting when pulling
the paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear)
Upshifting when pulling
the paddle shifter.
(Changes to a higher gear)
Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 358 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
359
uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode
Driving
SPORT Mode
To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.
The SPORT mode increases engine performance and handling.
This mode is suitable for driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.
The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
SPORT Button
SPORT Mode
Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 359 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
360
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control*
Driving
Cruise Control*
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
1Cruise Control*
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
3
WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
When to use
■Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
■Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
How to use
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
■Press the CRUISE button on
the steering wheel.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 360 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
361
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control*
Continued
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/– switch down when you
reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the RES/+/SET/– switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise
control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
■To Set the Vehicle Speed
On when cruise control begins
RES/+/SET/− Switch
Press down and release
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 361 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control*
362
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/– switch on the steering
wheel.
•Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
•If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
•Press the CANCEL button.
•Press the CRUISE button.
•Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed pressing the RES/+/
SET/– switch down on the steering wheel when
adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake
pedals.
■To Cancel
To decrease speed
To increase speed
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+/
SET/– switch up while driving at a speed of at least
25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
CRUISE Button
CANCEL Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 362 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
363
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera*
Continued
Driving
Front Sensor Camera*
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC with LSF, and CMBSTM, is
designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its
functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.
■Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera*
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Acura replacement windshield. Making even
minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or
installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Front Sensor
Camera
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 363 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera*
364
Driving
1Front Sensor Camera*
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
•Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
•Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 364 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
365
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Continued
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)
*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle slows to a stop, decelerates and
stops your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC with LSF slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle's brake
lights will illuminate.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with LSF.
Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always
keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC with LSF can lead to a
crash.
Use ACC with LSF only when driving on
expressways or freeways and in good
weather conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC with LSF has limited braking
capability and may not stop your vehicle
in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle
that quickly stops in front of you.
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal if the conditions require.
When to use
■Vehicle speed for ACC with LSF: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with
LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at
the speed of 25 mph (40km/h) or above.
■Shift position for ACC with LSF: In (D.
The radar sensor is
in the front grille.
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 365 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
366
Driving
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC with LSF and
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned
on or off.
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 370
When not using ACC with LSF: Turn off adaptive
cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will
turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Do not use ACC with LSF under the following
conditions:
•On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
•On roads with sharp turns.
•On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC with LSF will not apply the brakes to
maintain the set speed.
•On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
How to use
■Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
ACC (green) is on in the
instrument panel.
ACC with LSF is ready to
use.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 366 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 367
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Driving
When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal
and press down the RES/+/SET/– switch when you reach the desired speed. The
moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with LSF begins.
When driving at slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving
and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to
about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If the vehicle is
stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.
When ACC with LSF starts operating, the
vehicle icon, distance bars and set speed
appear on the multi-information display.
■To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the multi-information display
between mph and km/h.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
On when ACC with LSF
begins
Press down and release
RES/+/SET/− Switch
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Distance
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 367 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
368
Driving
■There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with LSF monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with LSF range. If a
vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with LSF system maintains or decelerates your
vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-distance from the
vehicle ahead.
2To Set or Change Following-Distance P. 373
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you
and is detected by the radar, your vehicle
starts to slow down.
■When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down
abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in
front of you, the beeper sounds and a message
appears on the multi-information display.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Even if the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with LSF may
start accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
•The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
•A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the distance
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle
detected in front of you comes in and goes out of the
ACC with LSF detecting range. Change the ACC
Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
Beep
ACC with LSF Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
A vehicle icon appears on the
multi-information display
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 368 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 369
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Driving
■There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC with LSF accelerates your
vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
■When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with LSF range.
ACC with LSF stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal,
the system resumes the set speed.
There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is
lightly applied.
■A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with LSF range and slows to a stops
Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the multi-
information display.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again,
the vehicle icon on the multi-information
display blinks. If you press the RES/+/SET/–
switch up or down, or depress the accelerator
pedal, ACC with LSF operates again within the
prior set speed.
1When in Operation
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
distance when using ACC with LSF. Additionally,
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 370
When your vehicle stops automatically because a
vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the
distance between the two vehicles will vary based on
the ACC with LSF following-distance setting, as
follows:
Short: 9.8 ft (3.0 m)
Middle: 12.1 ft (3.7 m)
Long: 14.4 ft (4.4 m)
Extra Long: 16.4 ft (5.0 m)
2To Set or Change Following-Distance
P. 373
3
WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
while the ACC with LSF system is operating
can result in the vehicle moving without
operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator
control can cause a crash, resulting in
serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
stopped by ACC with LSF.
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the multi-
information display
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 369 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
370
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
■Environmental conditions
•Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
■Roadway conditions
•Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
■Vehicle conditions
•The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
•An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.).
•The camera temperature gets too high.
•The parking brake is applied.
•When the front grille is dirty.
•When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats.
•When tire chains are installed.
■ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
1ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
The radar sensor for ACC with LSF is shared with the
collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).
2Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)* P. 412
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 370 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
371
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Continued
Driving
■Detection limitations
•A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
•The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
•A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
•When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
•The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
•When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
•When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
•The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
•An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
•Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
•When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
•When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
•When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
•When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 371 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
372
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/– switch on the steering
wheel.
•Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
•If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC with LSF may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
following-distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 372 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
373
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Continued
Driving
Press the (distance) button to change the
ACC with LSF following-distance.
Each time you press the button, the following-
distance (the interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of you) setting cycles through
short, middle, long, and extra long following-
distances.
Determine the most appropriate following-
distance setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-distance requirements set by local
regulation.
■To Set or Change Following-Distance
Distance Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 373 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
374
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following-distance becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
Following-distance
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
83 feet
25 meters
1.1 sec
100 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
110 feet
33 meters
1.5 sec
137 feet
42 meters
1.5 sec
Long
154 feet
47 meters
2.1 sec
200 feet
61 meters
2.1 sec
Extra
Long
204 feet
62 meters
2.8 sec
265 feet
81 meters
2.8 sec
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 374 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 375
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Driving
To cancel ACC with LSF, do any of the
following:
•Press the CANCEL button.
•Press the MAIN button.
uACC with LSF indicator goes off.
•Depress the brake pedal.
uWhen the LSF function has stopped the
vehicle, you cannot cancel ACC with LSF
by depressing the brake pedal.
■To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC with LSF, you can resume the prior set
speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+/SET/
– switch up.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with LSF has been turned off using the MAIN button.
Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then
set the desired speed.
CANCEL
Button
MAIN
Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 375 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
376
Driving
■Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when
ACC with LSF is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC
with LSF to automatically cancel:
•Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
•When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
•The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
•An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
•Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
•Abrupt steering wheel movement.
•When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
•When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
•When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
•When you manually apply the parking brake.
•When the detected vehicle within the ACC with LSF range is too close to your
vehicle.
•The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
The ACC with LSF automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following
causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
•The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
•The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
•The engine is turned off.
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed.
Wait until the condition that caused ACC with LSF to
cancel improves, then press the RES/+/SET/– switch
down.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 376 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
377
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF)*
Driving
Press and hold the (distance) button for one second.
Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds,
and then the mode switches to Cruise.
To switch back to ACC with LSF, press and hold the button again for one second.
■To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-distance from a vehicle
ahead of you.
ACC with
LSF ON
Cruise
Control ON
Distance Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 377 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
378
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)
Driving
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Alerts you when it detects the possibility of your vehicle colliding with the vehicle in
front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts.
uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).
■How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Models without Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW
Camera) P. 382
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Acura replacement windshield. Making even
minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or
installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate
the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW camera is
necessary for the system to operate properly.
LONG
NORMAL
SHORT
Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead
You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 378 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 379
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)
Driving
■Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on
when:
•The temperature inside the system is high.
•The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.
1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off,
when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the
vehicle away from the sun.
If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
If the Can Not Operate: Camera Too Hot message
appears:
•Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW camera.
The camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.
Beep
The beeper sounds and the BRAKE
message appears in the multi-
information display until a possible
collision is avoided.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 379 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
380
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)
Driving
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may
activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no
vehicle ahead, under the following conditions.
■FCW Limitations
Condition
●The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
●A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
●A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
●When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
●The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a tractor.
●When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period that makes it difficult for the sensor/camera to
properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
●When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
●When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
●A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
●An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
●When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
●When the temperature inside the system is high.
●A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
●You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
●When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
●When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
●When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned out.
●When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 380 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
381
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
Continued
Driving
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over detected lane markings.
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the Lane Departure
message appears on the multi-information
display, letting you know that you need to
take appropriate action.
The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are
met:
•The vehicle is traveling between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
•The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
•The turn signals are off.
•The brake pedal is not depressed.
■How the System Works
Models without Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
1Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
■How the System Activates
1How the System Activates
LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2Indicators P. 68
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 381 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
382
Driving
The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
■Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW Camera)
1Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW Camera)
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Acura replacement windshield. Making even
minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or
installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
LDW Camera
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 382 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 383
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
Driving
Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
uThe indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.
■LDW On and Off
1Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW Camera)
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun.
If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
If the Can Not Operate: Camera Too Hot message
appears:
•Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the LDW camera.
LDW Button
Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 383 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
384
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
Driving
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane, under the following conditions.
■LDW Limitations
Condition
●When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
●A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
●An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
●When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
●When the temperature inside the system is high.
●A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
●You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
●When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
●When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
●When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
uThe camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
●When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.
●When the road has many repaired area or an erased lane line.
●When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.
●When you drive in a lane with worn-out lane markings.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 384 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
385
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Continued
Driving
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your
vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
to detected lane markings without a turn
signal activated, the system, in addition to a
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts
you with rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane.
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure
message appears on the multi-information
display.
If the system determines that its steering input
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the
roadway, it may apply braking.
uBraking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
■How the System Works
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 387
There are times when you may not notice RDM
functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or
road surface conditions. If the Lane Departure
message appears repeatedly and you do not apply
responsive actions, the beeper sounds and RDM
functions will be canceled.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 385 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
386
Driving
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
•The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
•The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
•The turn signals are off.
•The brake pedal is not depressed.
•The wipers are not in continuous operation.
•The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
Press the RDM button to turn the system on
and off.
uThe indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the multi-
information display when the system is
on.
■How the System Activates
■RDM On and Off
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
indicator comes and stays on.
2Indicators P. 68
RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
•Not driven within a traffic lane.
•Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
•Driven in a narrow lane.
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the multi-information
display, the system does not operate the steering
wheel and braking.
RDM Button
Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 386 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
387
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Continued
Driving
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■Environmental conditions
•Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
•Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
•There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
•Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
•Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
•Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
•Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
•Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
•Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
•Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■RDM Conditions and Limitations
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 387 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
388
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Driving
■Roadway conditions
•Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
•Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
•Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
•The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
•The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
•The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
•The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
•Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
•When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
•Driving on roads with double lines.
■Vehicle conditions
•Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
•The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
•The inside of the windshield is fogged.
•The camera temperature gets too high.
•An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.).
•The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
•When tire chains are installed.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 388 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
389
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Continued
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 95
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the front windshield and
prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 394
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
() If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS
alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
■LKAS camera
Monitors the lane
lines
■Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
■Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the
steering to keep the vehicle between
the left and right lane lines. The applied
torque becomes stronger as the vehicle
gets closer to either of the lane lines.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 389 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
390
Driving
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
■Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
The LKAS may not function as designed on while
driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads
with sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected,
system will recover automatically.
■Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 390 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 391
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Driving
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
•The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
•The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
•You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
•The turn signals are off.
•The brake pedal is not depressed.
•The wipers are not in continuous operation.
■How to activate the system
1. Press the MAIN button.
uThe LKAS is on in the multi-information
display.
The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button.
uLane outlines appear on the multi-
information display.
The system is activated.
■When the System can be Used
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 391 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
392
Driving
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
uThe dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■To cancel
1When the System can be Used
The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to
detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines
again, it comes back on automatically.
1To cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with LSF
on and off.
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 392 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
393
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Continued
Driving
■The system operation is suspended if
you:
•Set the wipers to continuous operation.
uTurning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
•Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40
mph (64 km/h) or less.
uIncreasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
LKAS.
•Depress the brake pedal.
uThe LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
■The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
•The system fails to detect lane lines.
•The steering wheel is quickly turned.
•You fail to steer the vehicle.
•The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
■The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
•The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
•The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
•Driving through a sharp curve.
•Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
•The ABS or VSA system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the multi-
information display change to
contour lines, and the beeper
sounds.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 393 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
394
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Driving
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■Environmental conditions
•Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
•Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
•There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
•Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
•Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
•Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
•Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
•Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
•Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
•Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■LKAS Conditions and Limitations
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 394 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
395
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Driving
■Roadway conditions
•Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
•Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
•Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
•The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
•The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
•The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
•The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
•Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
•When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
•Driving on roads with double lines.
■Vehicle conditions
•Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
•The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
•The inside of the windshield is fogged.
•The camera temperature gets too high.
•An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.).
•The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 395 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
396
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 396 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
397
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially turn the VSA features on and off,
press and hold it until you hear a beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you press the button the last
time you drove the vehicle.
■VSA® OFF Button
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
With the button pressed, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the button pressed.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the button
pressed if you are not able to free it without.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
press the button again. We do not recommend
driving your vehicle with the button pressed
(indicator on).
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 397 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
398
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist System
Driving
Agile Handling Assist System
Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the
steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during
cornering.
Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) System
Monitors road conditions while you are driving. In response to current driving
conditions, the system automatically makes slight adjustment to the relative rear
wheel toe settings to help enhance vehicle control and stability.
1Agile Handling Assist System
The agile handling assist system cannot enhance
stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive
and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions
and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist system
does not activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the system is activated. This is
normal.
1Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) System
The Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) System
cannot enhance vehicle control and stability in all
driving situations. You still need to drive and corner
at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The toe setting of the rear wheels may get stuck in a
non-centered setting if the system malfunctions
while driving. This can cause the vehicle to pull to a
side even as you keep the steering wheel in the
center position. If this occurs, the system
automatically limits the vehicle speed to a maximum
of 50 mph (80 km/h). Reduce your speed and be
extra cautious, as handling may be difficult. Go to a
dealer immediately.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 398 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
399
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information (BSI) System*
Continued
Driving
Blind Spot Information (BSI) System*
Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle,
particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.”
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you
change lanes.
■How the system works
1Blind Spot Information (BSI) System*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, BSI has limitations. Over
reliance on BSI may result in a collision.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
object is within the alert zone, the following
situations may occur.
•The BSI alert indicator may not come on due to
obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind
Spot Info Not Available multi-information
display appearing.
•The BSI alert indicator may come on even with the
message appearing.
The BSI alert indicator may not come on under the
following conditions:
•A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds.
•A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
•
The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind spot
information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Radar sensors detect a
vehicle in the alert zone
when your vehicle is moving
forward at 20 mph (32 km/h)
or faster.
Alert zone range
A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors:
underneath the
rear bumper
corners
Alert Zone
A
B
C
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 399 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information (BSI) System*
400
Driving
■When the system detects a vehicle
1Blind Spot Information (BSI) System*
•An object not detected by the radar sensors
approaches or passes your vehicle.
•A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a
motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The system does not operate when in (R.
You can change the setting for BSI.
2Customized Features P. 103, 265
BSI may be adversely affected when:
•Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are
detected.
•An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
•Driving on a curved road.
•A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane.
•The system picks up external electrical interference.
•The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
•The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
•In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
For proper BSI operation:
•Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
•Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
•Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired,
or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
Comes on when:
●A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
to overtake you with a speed difference of
no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your
vehicle.
●You pass a vehicle with a speed difference
of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
BSI Alert Indicator: Located near the outside
rearview mirror on both sides.
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:
You move the turn signal lever in the direction
of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds
three times.
Comes On
Blinks
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 400 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
401
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are
driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes
significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on and a message appears on
the multi-information display.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
2If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks P. 525
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 401 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
402
Driving
To select the tire pressure monitor, set the power
mode to ON, and roll the right selector wheel
until you see the tire pressure screen.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in PSI
(U.S.) or kPa (Canada).
Tire Pressures Low is displayed when a tire
has significantly low pressure. The specific tire
is displayed on the screen.
■Tire Pressure Monitor
1Tire Pressure Monitor
The pressure displayed on the multi-information
display can be slightly different from the actual
pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a
significant difference between the two values, or if
the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the message
on the multi-information display do not go off after
you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure,
have the system checked by a dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor Problem may appear if you
drive with the compact spare tire*, or there is a
problem with the TPMS.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 402 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
403
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 403 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
404
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 404 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
405
Continued
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. You can
manually apply and release, or automatically release it.
■Manual operations
Use the electric parking brake switch to apply or release the brake. Manually
releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.
■To apply manually
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
uThe electric parking brake indicator
comes on.
■To release manually
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
uThe electric parking brake indicator goes
off.
■Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
You may hear the electric parking brake system
operating when you apply or release the parking
brake, or set the power mode to OFF. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2Jump Starting P. 516
The parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving with the electric parking brake switch being
pulled.
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 405 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
406
Driving
■To release automatically
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle
facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
When on a hill, it may require more
accelerator input to release.
uThe electric parking brake indicator goes
off.
You can release the parking brake automatically when:
•You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
•The engine is running.
•The shift lever is in any position other than (P or (N.
1Parking Brake
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
•When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with LSF* is activated.
•When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with
LSF*.
•When the engine is turned off while ACC with LSF*
is activated.
•When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
•When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.
•When the engine is turned off while brake hold is
applied.
•When there is a problem with the Brake Hold
System.
If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
•Malfunction indicator lamp
•Transmission indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
•Electric parking brake system indicator
•VSA® system indicator
•ABS indicator
•Supplemental restraint system indicator
Accelerator Pedal
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 406 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 407
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2Brake Assist System P. 411
2Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 410
■Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic brake
booster that, under certain conditions, such as
braking at high altitudes, supplements the vacuum
power assist. When the hydraulic brake booster
activates, you may hear a motor sound and a slight
vibration in the pedal. This is normal.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 407 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
408
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, such as
when you stop at a traffic light.
■Automatic Brake Hold
1Automatic Brake Hold
3
WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.
3
WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in (P and applying the parking
brake.
■Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
●The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.
■Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop. The shift lever must
be in (D or (N.
●The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
●Release the brake
pedal after the
automatic brake hold
indicator comes on.
■Canceling the system
Depress the accelerator
pedal while the shift
lever is in (D or (R. The
system is canceled and
the vehicle starts to
move.
●The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
continues to be on.
Accelerator PedalBrake PedalAutomatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
On On On
On
On
U.S.
Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 408 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
409
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
■The system automatically cancels when:
•You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P or (R.
•You engage the parking brake.
Under the following conditions, the system automatically cancels, and the parking
brake is applied:
•Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
•The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
•The engine is turned off.
•Brake Hold System Problem appears on the multi-information display.
■Turning off the automatic brake hold system
While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
uThe automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
while the system is in operation, press the
automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
1Automatic Brake Hold
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2When Stopped P. 420
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is
off.
1Turning on the system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation. The system generates sound while holding
the vehicle and it moves.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 409 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
410
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
•When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
•When tire chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 410 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
411
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
■Brake Assist System
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 411 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
412
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Driving
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
■How the system works
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 416
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
1How the system works
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you
when the your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62
mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle
detected in front of you.
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.
The radar sensor is
in the front grille.
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3
mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
When to use
The CMBSTM activates when:
●The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a
collision.
●Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 412 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 413
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Driving
■When the system activates
At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multi-
information display setting options.
2List of customizable options P. 106
■Vibration alert on the steering wheel
When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the
system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and
audible alerts.
uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).
1When the system activates
The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 416
The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
Lens
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and
stops if the collision is avoided.
uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Beep
Head-up
Warning
Lights
Visual Alerts
Audible Alert Tactile Alert
1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric
power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator P. 74
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 413 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
414
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Driving
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
■Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBSTM
The radar sensor
detects a vehicle E-pretensioner Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering
Wheel Braking
Stage
one
There is a risk of a
collision with the
vehicle ahead of
you.
—
When in Long, visual and
audible alerts come on at a
longer distance from a vehicle
ahead than in Normal setting,
and in Short, at a shorter
distance than in Normal.
In case of an
oncoming
vehicle
detected, rapid
vibration is
provided.
—
Stage
two
The risk of a
collision has
increased, time to
respond is
reduced.
Retracts the
driver’s seat belt
gently a few times,
providing a
physical warning.
Visual and audible alerts. —
Lightly
applied
Stage
three
The CMBSTM
determines that a
collision is
unavoidable.
Forcefully tightens
driver and front
passenger seat
belts.
Forcefully
applied
Your Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Normal
ShortLong
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 414 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 415
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Driving
Press this button until the beeper sounds to
switch the system on or off.
When the CMBSTM is off:
•The beeper sounds.
•The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
•A message on the multi-information display
reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBSTM is in the previously selected ON or
OFF setting each time you start the engine.
■CMBSTM On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the
CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain
conditions:
2CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 416
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 415 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
416
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2Front Sensor Camera* P. 363
■Environmental conditions
•Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
•Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
•There is little contrast between objects and the background.
•Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
•Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
•Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
•Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
•Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
•Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■Roadway conditions
•Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
•Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
■CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 416 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
417
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Continued
Driving
■Vehicle conditions
•Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
•The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
•The inside of the windshield is fogged.
•An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.).
•When tire chains are installed.
•The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
•The camera temperature gets too high.
•Driving with the parking brake applied.
•When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
■Detection limitations
•A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
•The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
•A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
•When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
•The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
•When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
•When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
•The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
•An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
•Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
•Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
•When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
•When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 417 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
418
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Driving
•When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
•Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
•When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
•When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
•When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
•When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
•When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 418 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
419
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Driving
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
■When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
■At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
■On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
■Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
■Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve.
■With Little Chance of a Collision
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
For the CMBSTM to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the emblem or replace the
emblem.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the
CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 419 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
420
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.
4. Turn off the engine.
uThe electric parking brake indicator goes off in about 15 seconds.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
•Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
•Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 420 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
421
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Continued
Driving
Parking Sensor System*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance
between your vehicle and the obstacle.
■The sensor location and range
1Parking Sensor System*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
•The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt.
•The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
•The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
•The system is affected by some electronic devices
that generate ultrasonic wave.
•Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:
•Thin or low objects.
•Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
•Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors
Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 421 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
422
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Driving
■Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the
parking sensor system button to turn on or off
the system. The indicator in the button comes
on and the beeper sounds when the system is
on.
The rear center and corner sensors start to
detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in
(R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The front corner sensors start to detect an
obstacle when the shift lever is in any position
other than (P, and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 422 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
423
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Continued
Driving
■When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter
*1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Length of the
intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator Audio/information screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate —Rear: About 43-24 in
(110-60 cm) Blinks in Yellow*1
Short About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
Blinks in Amber
Very short About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
Continuous About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less Blinks in Red
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 423 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
424
Driving
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button blinks.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
uThe beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds
three times when the rear sensors come back on.
■Turning off All Rear Sensors
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you shift to (R, the indicator in the parking
sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the
rear sensors have been turned off.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 424 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
425
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Continued
Driving
Cross Traffic Monitor*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
1Cross Traffic Monitor*
The parking sensor system’s alerting buzzer overrides
the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors
are detecting obstacles at the closest range.
3
CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when
reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
Models with parking sensor system
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 425 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
426
Driving
The system activates when:
•The power mode is in ON.
•The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 428
2Customized Features P. 265
•The shift lever is in (R.
•Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your
vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
■How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay
alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without
an approaching vehicle under the following
conditions:
•An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor’s scope.
•Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
•A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25
km/h).
•The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
•Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
•When there is bad weather.
•Your vehicle is on an incline.
•Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
•Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a poll, a
vehicle, and so on.
•The rear bumper or the sensors have been
improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been
deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper
corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.
Radar sensors:
Underneath the rear bumper
corners
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 426 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 427
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Driving
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information
screen.
■When the System Detects a Vehicle
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If on the lower right changes to (amber) when
the shift lever is in (R, mud snow or ice, etc. may
have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The
system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper
corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean
the area if necessary.
If (amber) comes on when the shift lever is in (R,
there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic
Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the shift lever in
(R, there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Rear Wide View Rear Normal View
Arrow Icon
Arrow Icon
Models with surround view camera system
Rear Ground View
Models with multi-view rear camera
Wide View Normal View Top Down View
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 427 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
428
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Driving
You can switch on and off the system using
the audio/information screen.
2Customized Features P. 265
■Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
Icon
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 428 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
429
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera*
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
interface dial to switch the angle.
If Top View is last used before you turn the power mode to OFF, Wide mode is
selected next time you turn the power on and move the shift lever to (R.
■Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2Customized Features P. 265
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R.
Off: Guidelines do not appear when the dynamic
guideline is off.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
Top Down View Mode
Normal View Mode
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 429 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
430
Driving
Surround View Camera System*
Is a four camera system that views areas commonly known as “blind spots” from
different angles, then displays the images on the audio/information screen. This
system can be used to:
•Check the right and left sides of the vehicle while crossing at intersections with
poor visibility (fog, heavy rain, obstructed view, etc.).
2Checking from the front wide view at intersections P. 438
•Check for obstacles in front of the vehicle when parking or maneuvering in
confined areas.
2Checking the sides of your vehicle P. 438
•Check for obstacles when you are moving in (R.
2Checking for Obstacles at the Back of Your Vehicle P. 434
•Assist you when backing into or parallel parking the vehicle in a lined parking
space.
2Reversing into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines P. 435
2Parallel Parking into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines P. 436
1Surround View Camera System*
3
WARNING
Failure to visually assess the area around
the vehicle (directly or by use of the
mirrors) may result in a crash causing
serious injury or death.
The areas shown in the surround view
camera system display are limited. The
display may not show all pedestrians or
other objects around your vehicle.
Do not solely rely only on the surround
view camera system display to assess
whether it is safe to move your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Failure to pay proper attention to your
surroundings while driving may result in a
crash causing serious injury or death.
To help mitigate the chances of a collision,
only look at the surround view camera
system display when it is safe to do so.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 430 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
431
uuSurround View Camera System*uDisplaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
Continued
Driving
Displaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
■For frontal views:
Press the CAMERA button when the vehicle is
stationary or moving at 12 mph (20 km/h) or
slower. Press the button again or the interface
dial to switch camera views.
■For rear reviews:
Move the shift lever to (R when the vehicle is
stationary. Press the CAMERA button or the
interface dial to switch to rear view mode.
You can customize the display setting.
2Customized Features P. 265
1Surround View Camera System*
The surround view camera system does not eliminate
all blind spots. The system is for your convenience
only.
Always keep the camera lenses clean and free from
debris.
The navigation system is disabled when the shift lever
is in (R.
CAMERA
Button
CAMERA
Button
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 431 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
432
uuSurround View Camera System*uDisplaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
Driving
■Camera Locations and Images
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 432 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
433
uuSurround View Camera System*uDisplaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
Driving
Following can be displayed when the system is on.
Guide lines: Help you to get a sense of a distance between your vehicle and the
rear surroundings. The distance may appear differently than the actual distance.
Projection lines: Indicate vehicle direction while the steering wheel is in the current
position.
Depending on your parking situation, you can select Back-in left park guidance,
Back-in right park guidance, Left parallel park guidance, or Right parallel
park guidance from Parking Guideline menu to display:
Initial position guide: Marks the point
where your vehicle is headed when reversing.
Steering position alignment guide:
Indicates when to change the steering wheel
position.
■Reference Lines and Guides
1Displaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
Operating the navigation system or audio system
while the surround view camera system screen is
displayed cancels the surround view camera system
screen and starts up the navigation system screen.
If you press the CAMERA button while the vehicle
speed is more than 15 mph (25 km/h), the standby
screen appears.
When the vehicle speed is reduced below 12 mph (20
km/h), the screen switches to a surround view camera
system image.
1Reference Lines and Guides
The positions/distances indicated by the guide lines
and camera views on the display may differ from the
actual positions/distances due to the changes in the
vehicle height, road conditions, and other factors.
The guide lines should be used as a reference only.
The guide lines can be turned on and off using the
audio/information screen.
2Customized Features P. 265
If you turn the guide lines off, they remain off until
you turn them back on.
To see the guidance on how to use the reference
lines and guides while they appear on the display,
press and hold the CAMERA button or the interface
dial. To close the guidance, press and hold the
CAMERA button or the interface dial again, or press
the BACK button.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 433 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
434
uuSurround View Camera System*uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
Driving
When Parking Your Vehicle
The display automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to
(R.
■Checking for Obstacles at the Back of Your Vehicle
1When Parking Your Vehicle
The ground view can be displayed even with the door
mirrors folded. However, the viewable angle and
blind spot change.
Do not refer to the surround view camera system
when the door mirrors are folded.
FoldedNot folded
Rear Wide ViewRear Normal View Rear Ground View
When the
steering wheel is
turned more
than 90 degrees.
The projection lines
appear approx. 10
inches (25 cm) outside
the vehicle body.
Blind spots
appear in
black.
Press the CAMERA
button.
Approximate distances
the guide lines indicate
Approximate distances the
projection lines indicate
39 inches (1 m)
79 inches (2 m)
118 inches
(3 m)
20 inches
(50 cm)
118 inches
(3 m)
1Checking for Obstacles at the Back of Your Vehicle
When moving the shift lever from/to (R, you may
experience a delay in switching between the audio/
information screen and a rear view image.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 434 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 435
uuSurround View Camera System*uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
Driving
1. With your vehicle at a complete stop, press the CAMERA button, then press the
MENU button. Rotate to select Back- in left park guidance or Back-in right
park guidance. Press .
2. Move the vehicle forward perpendicular to the parking space and stop where the
initial positioning guide in the display is at the center of the parking space.
3. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop.
uThe steering position alignment guide is displayed.
4. Slowly move the vehicle forward.
u
Stop the vehicle when the steering position alignment guide enters the parking space.
5. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop. Start reversing the vehicle slowly.
6. Stop the vehicle when it is parallel to the parking lines.
7. Return the steering wheel to its center position, then reverse the vehicle slowly
until it is parked within the space.
■Reversing into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
1Reversing into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
If the steering position alignment guide does not fit in
the parking lines, the parking space is too small for
the vehicle.
Reference lines can be useful only when the parking
space is in a rectangular shape with straight parking
marks and when vehicles in the next parking spaces
are within the spaces.
Must be wider than approx. 8 feet (2.5 m)
The initial positioning
guide must come here.
Must be wider than approx. 20 feet (6 m)
Make sure the guides
are within the parking
space when reversing.
Initial
Positioning
Guide
Steering Position
Alignment Guide
A
B
C
Steering position alignment
guide enters the parking
space. (Step 4)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 435 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System*uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
436
Driving
1. Press the CAMERA button, then press the MENU button. Rotate to select
Left parallel park guidance or Right Parallel park guidance. Press .
2. Move the vehicle forward parallel to the parking space and stop when the initial
positioning guide shown in the display overlaps the front corner of the space.
3. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop.
uThe steering position alignment guide is displayed.
4. Slowly reverse the vehicle.
uStop the vehicle when the steering position alignment guide overlaps the
sideline of the parking space.
5. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop. Reverse the vehicle slowly.
6. Stop the vehicle when it is parallel to the parking lines.
7. Return the steering wheel to its center position, then reverse the vehicle slowly
until it is parked within the space.
■
Parallel Parking into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
1
Parallel Parking into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
Reference lines can be useful only when the parking
space is in a rectangular shape with straight parking
marks and when vehicles in the next parking spaces
are within the spaces.
Initial
Positioning
Guide
Steering Position
Alignment Guide
Must be wider than approx. 20 feet (6 m)
Must be
wider than
approx. 8
feet (2.5 m)
Must be longer than approx. 21 feet (6.5 m)
A
BC
Initial
positioning
guide
overlaps the
front corner
of the space.
(Step 2)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 436 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 437
uuSurround View Camera System*uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
Driving
You can display the front ground view screen using all the four cameras for the
system. Pressing the CAMERA button when the vehicle speed is at below 12 mph
(20 km/h) changes the image as follows.
■Checking for the Sides of Your Vehicle
1Checking for the Sides of Your Vehicle
When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h),
the front or side view on the screen automatically
switches to the audio information screen. The front
or side view screen resumes when the vehicle speed
is reduced below 12 mph (20 km/h).
0 mph (0 km/h)
Down Up
Camera
Screen
Camera
Screen
Audio/information
Screen
Audio/information
Screen
15 mph (25 km/h)
0 mph (0 km/h) 12 mph (20 km/h)
Side
View
Front Wide View Front Ground View
Press and hold the
CAMERA button.
A Combined Image of
Both Side Views
Approximate distance
the reference line
indicates.
Blind spots
appear in black.
Projection lines
appear.
Press the CAMERA
button.
When the
steering wheel
is turned.
approx. 3 feet (1 m)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 437 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System*uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
438
Driving
■Checking from the front wide view at intersections
The front wide view screen is useful when you need to check for vehicles crossing
from either direction at an intersection with poor visibility.
■Checking the sides of your vehicle
The side view screens are convenient when you pull over at a curb or tollbooth, or
slowly pass by oncoming vehicles on a narrow road.
1Checking from the front wide view at intersections
The front wide view image is a wide-angled view. The
displayed image will be largely distorted, and objects
may appear closer or more distant than they actually
are.
The angle
provided by the
front wide view
screen is 180
degrees.
Front Wide View Screen
When the vehicle
speed is below 12
mph (20 km/h),
press the
CAMERA
button
repeatedly until
the front wide
view comes on.
1Checking the sides of your vehicle
When the door mirrors are folded, the side views
cannot be displayed.
Side View Screen
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 inches
(30 cm)
Press and hold the
CAMERA button.
Approximate distance
the projection lines
indicate is 12 inches (30
cm) from the vehicle.
Side Views
The images
from the side
cameras.
12 inches
(30 cm)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 438 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
439
uuSurround View Camera System*uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
Driving
The system may not work properly under the following conditions.
■Surround View Camera System Limitations
Conditions Solutions
The images may not
appear clearly when:
●You activate the system in bad weather (heavy rain,
snow, fog, etc.) or in the dark.
●Camera temperatures are high.
●A sudden change between light and dark such as an
entrance or exit of a tunnel.
●You drive into the sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk.)
Do not use the surround view camera system but rely
only on visual confirmation until the conditions allow
the system to work properly.
●A camera lens is covered with dirt, moisture, or
debris.
●A camera lens is scratched.
Clean camera lenses with a soft cloth moisturized with
water, mild detergent or glass cleaner.
The audio/information screen is dirty. Wipe off the screen using a soft dry cloth.
A camera angle is
altered.
A camera or the area around the camera has been
severely impacted.
Do not use the surround view camera system and
contact a dealer.
An error message is displayed while the surround view camera system is in use.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 439 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
440
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■Fuel recommendation
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the
engine and will result in decreased engine performance.
Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
■Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Acura
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit Acura Owners at owners.acura.com. In
Canada, visit www.acura.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 liters)
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 440 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
441
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel fill cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Press the fuel fill door release button.
uThe fuel fill door opens.
4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
uMake sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
uKeep the filler nozzle level.
uWhen the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
uAfter filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
Only a service station filler nozzle can be used.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 534
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
•Handle fuel only outdoors.
•Wipe up spills immediately.
Press
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 441 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
442
Driving
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
multi-information display.
•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
•Maintain the specified tire pressure.
•Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
•Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 L per 100 km
Liters of
fuel
Kilometers
driven
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 442 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
443
Driving
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
•Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
•Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or
backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
•Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2Fuses P. 526
•Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Acura components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
1Accessories and Modifications
Acura Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 443 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
444
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 444 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
445
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 446
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 447
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 448
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 449
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 454
Opening the Hood ........................... 455
Engine Compartment Cover............. 456
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 457
Oil Check......................................... 458
Adding Engine Oil............................ 459
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 460
Engine Coolant................................ 462
Transmission Fluid............................ 464
Brake Fluid....................................... 465
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 465
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 466
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 472
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 475
Tire and Loading Information Label...... 476
Tire Labeling .................................... 476
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......478
Wear Indicators ............................... 480
Tire Service Life................................ 480
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 481
Tire Rotation.................................... 482
Winter Tires ..................................... 483
Battery............................................... 484
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 485
Climate Control System Maintenance
.... 487
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 488
Exterior Care.................................... 490
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 445 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
446
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■Periodic inspections
•Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2Brake Fluid P. 465
•Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 475
•Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 466
•Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 472
■Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the multi-information display.
2Maintenance Service Items P. 452
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2Authorized Manuals P. 545
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 446 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
447
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
•To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
•Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
uHeat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
•To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
•Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
•Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
uOperate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.
•The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
uMake sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
•Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
uMake sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
•Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
uDo not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■Maintenance Safety
■Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 447 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
448
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Acura genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Acura genuine parts are manufactured according to the same
high quality standards used in Acura vehicles.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 448 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
449
Maintenance
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear the multi-information display every time you set the power mode to ON. The
messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle
to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 449 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
450
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the multi-information display.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Roll the right selector wheel until the engine oil life appears on the multi-
information display.
■Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
55 to 1
00
Remaining Engine Oil Life
Maintenance Service Items
Right Selector Wheel
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 450 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
451
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Continued
Maintenance
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6
percent. Once you switch the display
by rolling the right selector wheel, this
message will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and
serviced soon.
Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Roll the right selector wheel
to switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a negative
distance appears after driving over 10
miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Roll the right
selector wheel to switch to another
display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 451 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
452
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance
■Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder Message
System Message
Indicator
Main Item
Sub Items
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 452 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
453
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Go to the Maintenance Info. group.
2Customized Features P. 103
3. Push the right selector wheel.
uThe oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
4. Select Reset with the right selector wheel, then push the right selector wheel.
uThe displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then push the right selector wheel.
■Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Engine Oil Life
Maintenance Item Codes
Right Selector
Wheel
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 453 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
454
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 454 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
455
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
uThe hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
uThe hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Pull
Hood Release Handle
Lever
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 455 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
456
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover
Maintenance
Engine Compartment Cover
The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover.
You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work.
To remove the cover:
1Engine Compartment Cover
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Holding clip (A-type)
Push until the
pin is flat
Engine Compartment Cover
Remove the holding clips
Clip (A)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 456 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
457
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Acura Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown here.
■Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
•Genuine Acura Motor Oil
•Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
Ambient Temperature
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 457 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
458
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 458 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
459
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 459 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
460
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multi-
information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
uIf it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
uApply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter rubber seal.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
uTightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
Drain Bolt
Washer
Oil Filter
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 460 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
461
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
uEngine oil change capacity (including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
uIf necessary, add more engine oil.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 461 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
462
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
If temperatures consistently below -22°F (-30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Acura coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction
or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled
with Acura antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 462 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
463
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2Engine Compartment Cover P. 456
3. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to
relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
4. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
5. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
7. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
■Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Radiator Cap
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 463 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
464
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself. The
location of the ATF dipstick and fill increases the likelihood that you could be burned
when trying to check or change the ATF.
■Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Acura ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Acura ATF DW-
1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of
your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the
transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Acura ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Acura’s new vehicle warranty.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 464 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
465
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Maintenance
Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the multi-information display.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Acura Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
MIN
MAX
Brake Reservoir
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 465 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
466
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
Headlight bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace
the light assembly.
1Headlight Bulbs
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 466 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
467
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clips (A).
2. Push up the under cover.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
4. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until
it unlocks, and remove.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 27/8 W (Amber)
1Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Holding clip (A-type)
Push until the
pin is flat.
Clips (A)
Bulb
Socket
Under
Cover
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 467 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
468
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger’s side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver’s side: Turn the steering wheel to
the right.
2. Remove the holding clips (A) and (B), pull
the inner fender back.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs
Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Front Side Marker Light: 2 CP
1Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
flat.
Holding clip (B-type)
Clip
Push until the
pin is flat.
Inner Fender
Clip (A)
Clips (B)
Bulb Socket
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 468 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
469
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
3. Insert a new bulb.
Brake/Taillight and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
Brake/taillight and rear side marker light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized
Acura dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
Cover
Bulb Socket
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 469 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
470
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight Bulbs
Maintenance
Taillight Bulbs
Taillight bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
3. Insert a new bulb.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Cover
Socket
Bulb
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 470 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
471
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
Rear license plate light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs
High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
Door Outer Handle Ambient Light Bulbs
Door outer handle ambient light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 471 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
472
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
2. While holding the wiper switch in the
MIST position, set the power mode to ON,
then to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
uBoth wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the
image.
3. Lift both wiper arms.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 472 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
473
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Continued
Maintenance
4. Press and hold the tab, then slide the
blade out from the wiper arm.
5. Pull the end of the wiper blade to the
direction of the arrow in the image until it
unfastens from the holder’s end cap.
6. Pull the wiper blade to the opposite
direction to slide it out from its holder.
Tab
Wiper
Blade
End Cap at
the bottom
Holder
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 473 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
474
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
7. Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade
onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert
the blade all the way.
8. Install the end of the wiper blade into the
cap.
9. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm
until it locks.
10. Lower both wiper arms.
11. Set the power mode to ON and hold the
wiper switch in the MIST position until
both wiper arms return to the standard
position.
Cap
Wiper
Blade
Holder
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 474 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
475
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all
tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2)
per month.
■Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
•Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
•Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
•Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
•Excessive tread wear.
2Wear Indicators P. 480
•Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4 – 6 psi (30 – 40 kPa, 0.3 – 0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than
if checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Measure the spare tire pressure once a month or
before long trips.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 475 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
476
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uTire and Loading Information Label
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
aThe number of people your vehicle can carry.
bThe total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
cThe original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare, if
equipped.
dThe proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare, if equipped.
Label
Example
Example Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
245/40R19 98W
245: Tire width in millimeters.
40: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
19: Rim diameter in inches.
98: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
W: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 476 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
477
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 477 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
478
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 478 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
479
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■Traction
■Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 479 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
480
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare*, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
1Checking Tires
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/
h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size 245/40R19 98W
Pressure Front: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.7 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 480 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
481
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist (VSA®)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 481 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
482
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
FRONT
Direction Mark
Front
Front
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 482 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
483
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
•Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
•Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
•Install them on the front tires only.
•Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
•Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
•Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
•Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 483 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
484
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
The battery condition is being monitored by
the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is
a problem with the sensor, the warning
message on multi-information display will let
you know. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
•The audio system is disabled.
2Reactivating the audio system P. 194
•The clock resets.
2Clock P. 114
•The navigation system is disabled.
2Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry
the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance,
wear protective clothing and a face shield,
or have a skilled technician do it.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 484 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
485
Continued
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
uRemove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
uWrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the keyless access remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 485 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
486
Maintenance
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
uAs a convenience, lightly place masking
tape over the remote buttons to hold
them in place.
2. Remove the upper half by carefully prying
on the edge with a coin.
uWrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the transmitter.
3. Press down on the center of the assembly
and remove the battery.
uWhen removing the button battery, be
careful not to touch parts around it.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Models with remote control engine start system
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
The Remote transmitter is equipped with two
batteries: A standard replaceable CR2032 coin
button battery and an integral non-replaceable
rechargeable battery. To prevent permanent damage
to the rechargeable battery, replace the CR2032
battery every three to four years.
Models with remote control engine start system
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 486 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
487
Maintenance
Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 487 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
488
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
■Cleaning the Window
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 488 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
489
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance
The floor mats hook over the floor anchors,
which keep the mats from sliding forward. To
remove the mats for cleaning, turn the anchor
knobs to the unlock position. When
reinstalling the mats after cleaning, turn the
knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
■Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Unlock
Lock
■Maintaining Genuine Leather
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 489 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
490
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
•If driving on roads with road salt.
•If driving in coastal areas.
•If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
•Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
•Fold in the door mirrors.
•Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers*.
•Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
•Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
•Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
■Washing the Vehicle
■Using an Automated Car Wash
■Using High Pressure Cleaners
■Applying Wax
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 490 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
491
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■Cleaning the Window
■Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
■Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 491 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
492
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 492 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
493
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 494
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 495
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 507
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 513
If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak ............................................. 514
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 515
Jump Starting.................................... 516
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 519
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 520
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 522
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 522
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 523
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On.. 523
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On .............................. 524
If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator
Comes On............................................. 524
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 525
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 526
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 530
Emergency Towing........................... 531
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 532
When You Cannot Open the Trunk .....533
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container ... 534
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 493 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
494
Handling the Unexpected
Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Jack
Jack Handle Bar Towing Hook
Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Funnel
Flat-tip Screwdriver Grip
Towing Hook Funnel
Flat-tip Screwdriver Grip
Tool Case
Vehicle with temporary tire repair
kit is shown.
Vehicles with temporary tire repair kit
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 494 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
495
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the
vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can
use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station
for a more permanent repair.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
Vehicles with temporary tire repair kit
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
The kit should not be used in the following situations.
Instead, contact a dealer or a roadside assistant to
have the vehicle towed.
•The tire sealant has expired.
•More than one tire is punctured.
•The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
•The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the contact area.
•Damage has been caused by driving with the tire
extremely under inflated.
•The tire bead is no longer seated.
•The rim is damaged.
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the
tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
able to repair the puncture using the kit.
NOTICE
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent other than the
one provided in the kit that came with your vehicle. If
a different agent is used, you may permanently
damage the tire pressure sensor.
When the puncture is: Kit Use
Smaller than 3/16 inch
(4 mm) Yes
Larger than 3/16 inch
(4 mm) No
Contact
Area
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 495 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
496
Handling the Unexpected
■Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
Repair notification label and speed restriction label
are applied to the side of temporary tire repair kit.
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
instruction manual provided with the kit.
Instruction Manual
Air Only Hose (Black)
Speed Restriction LabelRepair Notification Label
Pressure Relief
Button
Inflator Switch
Selector Switch
SEALANT/AIR side
Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
AIR ONLY side
Power Plug
Pressure Gauge
Tire Sealant
Expiration Date
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 496 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
497
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
1. Pull the handle on the trunk floor lid and
open the lid.
2. Hook the handle to the edge of the trunk
opening.
3. Take the kit out of the case.
4. Place the kit face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
Handle
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 497 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
498
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
stem.
2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the
packaging.
3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
■Injecting Sealant and Air
1Injecting Sealant and Air
In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.
In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.
The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other
materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away
any spills immediately.
3
WARNING
Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.
If accidentally swallowed, do not induce
vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get
medical attention immediately.
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool
water and get medical attention if
necessary.
Valve Stem
Valve Cap
Sealant/Air Hose
Valve Stem
Sealant/Air Hose
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 498 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 499
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory
power socket.
uBe careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
uDo not plug any other electronic
devices into other accessory power
sockets.
2Accessory Power Sockets P. 171
5. Start the engine.
uKeep the engine running while injecting
sealant and air.
2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 64
6. Turn the selector switch to SEALANT/
AIR.
1Injecting Sealant and Air
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure
shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
actual. After the sealant injection is complete the
pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
compressor off only after the sealant injection is
complete.
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
SEALANT/AIR side
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 499 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
500
Handling the Unexpected
7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the
compressor.
uThe compressor starts injecting sealant
and air into the tire.
8. When the sealant injection is complete,
continue to add air.
9. After the air pressure reaches front:35 psi
(240 kPa)/rear:33 psi (230 kPa), turn off
the kit.
uTo check the pressure, occasionally turn
off the compressor and read the gauge.
10. Unplug the power plug from the accessory
power socket.
11. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
12. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
Pressure Gauge
ON
OFF
1Injecting Sealant and Air
If the required air pressure is not reached within 15
minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
the kit to provide the necessary seal and your vehicle
will need to be towed.
See an Acura dealer for a replacement sealant bottle
and proper disposal of an empty bottle.
Sealant/Air Hose
Valve Stem
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 500 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
501
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
13. Apply the repair notification label to the
flat surface of the wheel.
uThe wheel surface must be clean to
ensure the label adheres properly.
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the
location as shown.
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
uDo not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Repair Notification Label
U.S.
Canada
■Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
Speed Restriction Label
U.S.
Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 501 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
502
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
4. Recheck the air pressure using the air only
hose on the compressor.
5. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
uDo not turn the air compressor on to
check the pressure.
2Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 504
6. If the air pressure is
•Less than 19 psi (130 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak
is too severe. Call for help and have your
vehicle towed.
2Emergency Towing P. 531
•Front:35 psi (240 kPa)/rear:33 psi (230
kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or
until you reach the nearest service station.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
uIf the air pressure does not go down after
the 10 minute driving, you do not need
to check the pressure any more.
Air Only Hose
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 502 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 503
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
•Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less
than front:35 psi (240 kPa)/rear:33 psi
(230 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the
tire until the tire pressure reaches front:35
psi (240 kPa)/rear:33 psi (230 kPa).
2Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 504
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or
until you reach the nearest service station.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
uYou should repeat this procedure as long
as the air pressure is within this range.
7. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
8. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
AIR ONLY
side
ON
1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Pressure Relief Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 503 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
504
Handling the Unexpected
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
the Flat Tire P. 496
2. Remove the kit from the case.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
4. Remove the air only hose from the kit.
5. Remove the valve cap.
6. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.
■Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.
Air Only Hose
Valve Cap
Valve Stem
Air Only Hose
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 504 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 505
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power
socket.
uBe careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
uDo not plug any other electronic
devices into other accessory power
sockets.
2Accessory Power Sockets P. 171
8. Start the engine.
uKeep the engine running while injecting
air.
2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 64
9. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.
uThe compressor starts to inject air into
the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
AIR ONLY
side
ON
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 505 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
506
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
12. Turn off the kit.
uCheck the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
uIf overinflated, press the pressure relief
button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
14. Unscrew the air only hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
15. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
Pressure Relief Button
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 506 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
507
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
NOTICE
Do not use an unapproved puncture-repairing agent
on a flat tire, as it can damage the tire pressure
sensor.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 507 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
508
Handling the Unexpected
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire P. 495
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
■Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
The shape of the tool case varies by model.
Spare Tire
Tool Case
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 508 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
509
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 509 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
510
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
uMake sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
•Do not use while the engine is running.
•Use only where the ground is firm and level.
•Use only at the jacking points.
•Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
•Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jack
Handle
Bar Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 510 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Continued 511
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m)
■Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 511 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
512
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
2. Wrap the spacer cone and spare tire wing
bolt with cloth or paper, and store them in
the spare tire well.
3. Store the jack and tools in the tool case.
Place the tool case and the trunk floor lid on
the flat tire.
4. Close the trunk.
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressure
Monitor Problem appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a full-size tire, the warning message on the multi-
information display and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few
miles (kilometers).
■Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Spacer Cone
Wing Bolt
■TPMS and the Spare Tire
1TPMS and the Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
that it is correct.
Use the TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 512 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
513
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the multi-information display.
●If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 514
uMake sure the keyless access remote is in its operating range.
2ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 137
Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
●If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2Battery P. 484
●If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 526
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 348
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2Immobilizer System P. 131
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 97
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 530
If the problem continues:
2Emergency Towing P. 531
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2Jump Starting P. 516
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 513 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
514
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the multi-information display, the indicator on the ENGINE START/
STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start. Start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the A logo on the keyless
access remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the keyless access remote
should be facing you.
uThe indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds while the
indicator stays on.
uIf you do not depress the pedal, the
mode will change to ACCESSORY.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 514 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
515
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
•Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
•Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 515 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
516
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Open the fuse box cover on the positive +
terminal.
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
uIf you use a booster battery, only use a
12-volt booster battery.
uWhen using an automotive battery
charger, select a charging voltage lower
than 15-volts. Check the charger manual
for the proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
■Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cable clips so that they do
not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster Battery
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 516 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
517
uuJump Startingu
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
5. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine hanger as
shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to
any other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 517 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
518
uuJump Startingu
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■What to Do After the Engine Starts
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 518 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
519
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the keyless
access remote.
3. Open the lid of the center pocket.
4. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
5. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
6. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N.
uThe lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■Releasing the Lock
Cover
Slot
Release
Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 519 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
520
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
•The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
•Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
uNo steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
uSteam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the mark may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood or engine
compartment if steam is coming out.
H
H
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 520 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
521
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Handling the Unexpected
■Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
uIf the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
uIf the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
uIf there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 521 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
522
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
2Oil Check P. 458
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
uThe indicator goes off: Start driving again.
uThe indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 522 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
523
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
•Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system.
•Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•The brake fluid is low.
•There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
•If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
•If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 523 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
524
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
•If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the electric parking brake
system.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Avoid using the parking brake and immediately get your vehicle
inspected at a dealer.
■What to do when the electric parking brake indicator comes on
or blinks at the same time.
•Release the parking brake. If you cannot release it, immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe place and call a dealer.
•If only the electric parking brake indicator goes off, immediately get
your vehicle inspected at a dealer.
•If the electric parking brake indicator remains on or blinks even after
releasing the parking brake, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and call a dealer.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 524 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
525
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or
the compact spare tire* is installed, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver’s side doorjamb.
■What to do when the indicator blinks
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire* causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 525 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
526
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
and check to see if any applicable fuse is
blown.
There are three fuse boxes in the engine
compartment.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1IG1A ACG FR 15 A
2IG1A MISS SOL1 10 A
3 − −
4− −
5SMART (7.5 A)
6 IG1B ECU FR 7.5 A
7IG1B OP FR 7.5 A
8 IGP2 15 A
9DBW 15 A
10 IGP 15 A
11 IG Coil 15 A
12 ACM 20 A
13 − −
14 Interior Lights 10 A
15 Back Up Radio 10 A
16 Back Up 10 A
17 MG Clutch 7.5 A
18 Front Washer 15 A
19 Stop 7.5 A
20 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
21 Trunk 10 A
22 Small 15 A
23 − −
24 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
25 − −
26 Right Headlight Low Beam 15 A
27 Left Headlight Low Beam 15 A
28 IGP2 Sub 7.5 A
29 Power Rear Sunshade*(20 A)
30 Headlight Washer*30 A
31 Wiper 30 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 526 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
527
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to
open the box.
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1Main Fuse 150 A
2
Horn & Hazard 30 A
R/B Main 2 60 A
ABS/VSA RLY 30 A
RFC 50 A
R/B Main 3 50 A
AS F/B Main 2 60 A
ABS/VSA Motor 40 A
Heater Motor 40 A
3
R/B Main 1 60 A
DR F/B Main 1 60 A
AS F/B Main 1 60 A
IG Main 1 30 A
DR F/B Main 2 60 A
IG Main 2 30 A
Left Precision All Wheel
Steer 40 A
Rear Defroster 40 A
4 ST MG 30 A
5Left Electric Parking Brake 30 A
6 Right Electric Parking Brake 30 A
7Injector 20 A
8 Hazard 15 A
9 − −
10 − −
11 Horn 10 A
Circuit Protected Amps Located near the + terminal on the battery.
Push the tabs to open the box.
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
EPS 80 A
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 527 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
528
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the under panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■
Driver’s Side Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1Driver’s Side Door Lock 10 A
2Passenger’s Side Door Lock 10 A
3Driver’s Door Lock 10 A
4Driver’s Side Door Unlock 10 A
5Passenger’s Side Door
Unlock 10 A
6Driver’s Door Unlock 10 A
7Door Lock 20 A
8 − −
9Tilt Steering Wheel 20 A
10 IG1 DR1 7.5 A
11 Meter 10 A
12 IG1 Box 20 A
13 ACCESSORY 7.5 A
14 − −
15 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding 20 A
16 Moonroof 20 A
17 Rear Driver’s Side Power
Window 20 A
18 Telescopic Steering Wheel 20 A
19 Driver’s Power Window 20 A
20 Left e-pretensioner*(20 A)
21 Fuel Pump 20 A
22 − −
23 ST Cut 7.5 A
24 IG1 DR2 7.5 A
25 Start DIAG 7.5 A
26 A/C 7.5 A
27 DRL 7.5 A
28 ACC Key Lock 7.5 A
29 Driver’s Lumbar Support 7.5 A
30 SMART 10 A
31 − −
32 Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining 20 A
33 Right Precision All Wheel
Steer 40 A
34 IG1 Box 30 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 528 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
529
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located on the lower side panel. Take off
the cover to open.
Fuse locations are shown on the cover.
■Passenger’s Side Interior Fuse
Box
Fuse Label
Cover
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 − −
2Front Seat Heaters/AVS 20 A
3Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window 20 A
4Front Passenger’s Lumbar
Support 7.5 A
5 − −
6 − −
7Passenger’s Power Seat
Sliding 20 A
8Passenger’s Power Seat
Reclining 20 A
9Rear Seat Heaters*(20 A)
10 − −
11 Fly Start 15 A
12 Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment) 20 A
13 Accessory Power Socket
(Center Pocket) 20 A
14 AS ECU 7.5 A
15 Glove Box 7.5 A
16 − −
17 − −
18 Front Passenger’s Power
Window 20 A
19 SRS1 10 A
*1:Models without surround view camera
system
*2:Models with surround view camera
system
20 ABS/VSA 7.5 A
21 − −
22 e-pretensioner*(7.5 A)
23 − −
24 SRS2 7.5 A
25 Illumination 7.5 A
26 Right e-pretensioner*(20 A)
27 Heated Steering Wheel*10 A
28 Audio AMP 30 A*1
40 A*2
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 529 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
530
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories
off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
uIf the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
uIf there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 526 to 529.
There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse
box located near the brake fluid reservoir.
Blown Fuse
Combined Fuse
Blown
Fuse
Fuse Puller
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 530 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
531
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the only way you can safely transport your vehicle.
Any other towing method will damage the vehicle’s drive system.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 531 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
532
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk and remove the cover.
2. Pull the release lever toward you.
uThe release lever unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled.
1When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
Cover
Release Lever
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 532 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
533
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Open the Trunk
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk pass-through cover.
2Trunk Pass-through Cover P. 174
2. Pull the trunk release handle down.
1When You Cannot Open the Trunk
What to do-following up
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
Trunk Pass-through Cover
Trunk Release Handle
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 533 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
534
Handling the Unexpected
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press the fuel fill door release button.
uThe fuel fill door opens.
3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the
trunk.
2Types of Tools P. 494
4. Remove the funnel from the case.
5. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
uMake sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
6. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
uPour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
7. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
uWipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
8. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
NOTICE
Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
•Handle fuel only outdoors.
•Wipe up spills immediately.
Funnel Case
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 534 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
535
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 536
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine
Number and Transmission Number .... 538
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 539
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 540
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 541
Warranty Coverages ........................ 543
Authorized Manuals......................... 545
Client Service Information ............... 546
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 535 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
536
Information
Specifications
■Vehicle Specifications
Model Acura RLX
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating
U.S.: 4,993 lbs (2,265 kg)
Canada: 2,265 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
U.S.: 2,778 lbs (1,260 kg)
Canada: 1,260 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)
Canada: 1,030 kg
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 16.0 - 17.8 oz (455 - 505 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8
■Engine Specifications
■Fuel
■Washer Fluid
Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK DILZKR7B11G
Type Unleaded premium gasoline, Pump octane
number of 91 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.3 US qt (5.0 ℓ)
■Light Bulbs
*1: Not available on all models
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam) LED
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights 27/8W (Amber)
Front Side Marker Lights 2CP
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors) LED
Brake/Taillights/Rear Side Marker
Lights LED
Taillights LED
Back-Up Lights 16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Lights LED
Door Outer Handle Ambient Lights LED
Interior Lights
Front and Rear Map Lights LED
Front and Rear Ambient Lights LED
Vanity Mirror Lights 2.1W
Front Door Pocket Lights LED
Center Pocket Light LED
Beverage Holder Light LED
Door Courtesy Lights 3.4W
Console Compartment Light LED
Glove Box Light LED
Front and Rear*1 Foot Lights LED
Door Inner Handle Lights LED
Trunk Light 5W
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 536 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
537
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■Brake Fluid
■Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Acura ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Capacity Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 ℓ)
■Engine Oil
■Engine Coolant
Recommended ·Genuine Acura Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
Specified Acura Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
2.1 US gal (8.0 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.225 US gal (0.85 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■Tire
*1: Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Regular
Size 245/40R19 98W
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front 35 (240 [2.4])
Rear 33 (230 [2.3])
Compact
Spare*1
Size T155/70D17 110M
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular 19 x 8J
Compact Spare*1 17 x 4T
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 537 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
538
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle's VIN, engine number and transmission number are
shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Automatic
Transmission
Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Identification Number
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 538 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
539
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC
(Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
AcuraLink
Audio System
Blind Spot Information System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 539 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
540
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 540 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
541
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has “Readiness Codes,” as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components
are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The
malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 541 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
542
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 542 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
543
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■U.S.Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Acura accessories are covered under this warranty.
Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Acura replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 543 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
544
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Acura
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 544 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
545
Information
Authorized Manuals
■Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■For U.S. Owners:
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■For Canadian Owners:
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 545 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
546
Information
Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership’s service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s management, contact Acura Client Relations/
Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Relations
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Acura Client Services
180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-866-78-ACURA
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: acura_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
1Client Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•Vehicle Identification Number
2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number P. 538
•Date of purchase
•Odometer reading of your vehicle
•Your name, address, and telephone number
•A detailed description of the problem
•Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 546 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
547
uuClient Service Informationu
Continued
Information
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a
CD, information such as the recording artist
and track name are retrieved from the
Gracenote Database and displayed (when
available).
Gracenote may not contain information for
all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist, album,
and track information from CDs to display
on the HDD.
Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates
a year. More information about Gracenote,
its features, and downloads are available at
■Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
www.acura.com (in U.S.) or www.acura.ca
(in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000 to present Gracenote.
One or more patents owned by Gracenote
apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list
of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.
This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,
California (“Gracenote”). The software
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music- related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
■Gracenote® END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal non-
commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 547 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
548
uuClient Service Informationu
Information
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding
the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are error-
free or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2009
Requirements to access Pandora®
•Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or
iPhone.
•Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/> or on your
smartphone)
•Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.
■Disclaimer of Pandora®
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 548 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
549
uuClient Service Informationu
Information
Limitations
•Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
•Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
•Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at http://
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the
Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used
with permission.
•Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
•Pandora is only available in the United
States.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 549 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
Index
550
Index
Index
A
AAC.................................................... 227, 251
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 410
Accessories and Modifications................. 443
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 171
AcuraLink .................................................. 333
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF)............................ 82, 365
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 462
Engine Oil................................................ 457
Washer.................................................... 465
Additives, Engine Oil................................ 457
Adjusting
Armrest ................................................... 162
Front Seats .............................................. 156
Head Restraints........................................ 159
Mirrors .................................................... 153
Steering Wheel ........................................ 152
Temperature............................................ 100
Adjusting the Clock .................................. 114
Agile Handling Assist System ................... 398
AhaTM Menu .............................................. 250
AhaTM Radio .............................................. 260
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System) .................................................... 181
Changing the Mode ................................ 184
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 188
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 487
Rear Temperature Control Dial ................ 189
Sensors ................................................... 190
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 181
Air Pressure....................................... 476, 537
Airbags........................................................ 37
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43
Airbag Care............................................... 51
Driver’s Knee Airbag.................................. 44
Event Data Recorder.................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 40
Indicator.............................................. 49, 74
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 50
Sensors ..................................................... 37
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 48
AM/FM Radio............................................ 219
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 410
Indicator.................................................... 74
Armrest ..................................................... 162
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 195
Audio System............................................ 192
Adjusting the Sound................................ 209
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 193
Error Messages........................................ 256
General Information ................................ 261
HDD........................................................ 230
Internet Radio ......................................... 248
iPod ........................................................ 240
MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 227, 251
Reactivating ............................................ 194
Recommended CDs ................................ 262
Recommended Devices ........................... 264
Remote Controls..................................... 195
Security Code ......................................... 194
Shortcuts ................................................ 198
Theft Protection ...................................... 194
USB Flash Drives...................................... 264
USB Port ................................................. 193
Audio/Information Screen ....................... 205
Authorized Manuals ................................ 545
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 127
Customize ...................................... 109, 281
Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 408
Indicator ........................................... 70, 408
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator ........................................... 70, 408
Automatic Lighting.................................. 142
Automatic Transmission .......................... 354
Creeping................................................. 354
Fluid ....................................................... 464
Kickdown ............................................... 354
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 17, 356
Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 519
Shifting................................................... 355
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 193
Average Fuel Economy ............................ 100
Average Speed ......................................... 101
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 550 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
551
Index
B
Battery ...................................................... 484
Charging System Indicator ................ 72, 522
Jump Starting ......................................... 516
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 484
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 485
Belts (Seat).................................................. 30
Beverage Holders..................................... 170
Blind Spot Information (BSI) System....... 399
Bluetooth® Audio..................................... 254
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.................... 293
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 63
Brake System ............................................ 405
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 410
Automatic Brake Hold............................. 408
Brake Assist System................................. 411
Fluid ....................................................... 465
Foot Brake .............................................. 407
Parking Brake.......................................... 405
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 71
Brake System Indicator (Red) ............ 68, 523
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 148
BSI (Blind Spot Information) System....... 399
Bulb Replacement.................................... 466
Back-Up Lights........................................ 470
Brake/Taillights and Rear Side Marker
Lights.................................................... 469
Door Outer Handle Ambient Lights ......... 471
Front Side Marker Lights ......................... 468
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights .............. 467
Headlights .............................................. 466
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 471
Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 471
Rear Turn Signal Lights ............................ 469
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 468
Taillights.................................................. 470
Bulb Specifications ................................... 536
C
CAMERA Button ....................................... 431
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 64
Cargo Hooks ............................................. 173
Carrying Cargo.................................. 343, 345
CD Player................................................... 227
Center Pocket ........................................... 169
Certification Label .................................... 538
Changing Bulbs......................................... 466
Charging System Indicator................. 72, 522
Child Safety................................................. 52
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 126
Child Seat .................................................... 52
Booster Seats............................................. 63
Child Seat for Infants................................. 54
Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 55
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt.......................................................... 59
Larger Children.......................................... 62
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 54
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 56
Using a Tether ........................................... 61
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 126
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 490
Cleaning the Interior................................ 488
Client Service Information ....................... 546
Climate Control System............................ 181
Changing the Mode ................................ 184
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 188
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 487
Rear Temperature Control Dial ................ 189
Sensors ................................................... 190
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 181
CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM)................................................. 412
Coat Hooks ............................................... 172
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)................................................. 412
Compact Spare Tire (Optional)........ 507, 537
Console Compartment ............................. 168
Controls..................................................... 113
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 462
Adding to the Radiator............................ 463
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 462
Overheating ............................................ 520
Creeping (Automatic Transmission) ........ 354
Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 425
Cruise Control........................................... 360
Indicator.................................................... 78
Cup Holders .............................................. 170
Customized Features........................ 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 551 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
552
Index
D
Daytime Running Lights........................... 144
Dead Battery............................................. 516
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows.................................................. 188
Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 539
Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 141
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 153
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 458
Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 140
Door Mirrors ............................................. 154
Doors ......................................................... 115
Auto Door Locking .................................. 127
Auto Door Unlocking............................... 127
Door Open Message .................................. 29
Keys ........................................................ 115
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside......................................... 12, 124
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Outside............................................ 118
Lockout Prevention System ...................... 122
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 478
Driver’s Knee Airbag .................................. 44
Driving....................................................... 341
Automatic Transmission........................... 354
Braking.................................................... 405
Cruise Control ......................................... 360
Shifting Gear ........................................... 355
Starting the Engine .................................. 348
Driving Position Memory System ............ 150
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 487
E
Elapsed Time............................................. 101
Electric Parking Brake
Indicator.................................................... 69
Electric Parking Brake System
Indicator............................................ 69, 524
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 74, 524
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 396
Emergency ................................................ 531
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 541
Engine ....................................................... 538
Coolant................................................... 462
Jump Starting.......................................... 516
Oil........................................................... 457
Remote Engine Start................................ 350
Starting ................................................... 348
Switch Buzzer.......................................... 137
Engine Compartment Cover .................... 456
Engine Coolant......................................... 462
Adding to the Radiator............................ 463
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 462
Overheating ............................................ 520
Temperature Gauge .................................. 97
Engine Oil ................................................. 457
Adding.................................................... 459
Checking................................................. 458
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 450
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 68, 522
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 457
ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 137
e-pretensioners .......................................... 32
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System........ 74
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Monoxide) ................................................ 64
Expanded Rear Door Sunshades ............. 180
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror............... 155
Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 490
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 154
F
Features .................................................... 191
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 487
Oil .......................................................... 460
Flat Tire..................................................... 495
Floor Mats ................................................ 489
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 464
Brake ...................................................... 465
Engine Coolant ....................................... 462
Windshield Washer ................................. 465
Foot Brake ................................................ 407
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 378
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40
Front Seat Heaters ................................... 176
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 552 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
553
Index
Front Seat Heaters and Seat
Ventilation.............................................. 177
Front Seats................................................ 156
Adjusting ................................................ 156
Front Sensor Camera ............................... 363
Fuel ..................................................... 18, 440
Economy................................................. 442
Gauge ...................................................... 97
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 101
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 73
Range ..................................................... 101
Recommendation............................ 440, 536
Refueling ................................................ 440
Fuel Economy ........................................... 442
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 18, 441
Fuses ......................................................... 526
Inspecting and Changing ........................ 530
Locations ................................ 526, 528, 529
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 442
Gauge ...................................................... 97
Information............................................. 440
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 101
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 73
Refueling ................................................ 440
Gauges........................................................ 97
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission .......................... 355
Glass (care) ........................................ 488, 491
Glove Box .................................................. 165
H
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 493
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)............................... 293
Auto Answer ........................................... 308
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History ............................................ 310
Automatic Transferring ............................ 308
Displaying Messages................................ 328
Editing User Name................................... 307
HFL Buttons............................................. 293
HFL Menus .............................................. 295
HFL Status Display ................................... 294
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 294
Making a Call .......................................... 319
Options During a Call .............................. 325
Phone Setup............................................ 299
Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 314
Receiving a Call ....................................... 324
Receiving a Text/E-mail Message .............. 326
Ring Tone................................................ 309
Roadside Assistance................................. 332
Selecting a Mail Account ......................... 327
Speed Dial ............................................... 311
To Create a Security PIN .......................... 306
To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message
Options ................................................. 304
Use Contact Photo .................................. 309
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio .................. 230
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
Head Restraints ........................................ 159
Headlight Washers ................................... 147
Headlights................................................. 141
Aiming.................................................... 466
Automatic Operation............................... 142
Dimming ......................................... 141, 144
Operating................................................ 141
Heated Steering Wheel............................ 175
Heaters (Seat) ........................... 176, 177, 178
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............................... 293
High Beam Indicator .................................. 77
Hill Start Assist System ............................. 352
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 291
I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission ......................... 538
Vehicle Identification ............................... 538
Illumination Control
Buttons ................................................... 148
Immobilizer System .................................. 131
Indicator.................................................... 77
Indicators .................................................... 68
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) ..................................... 82, 365
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 74
Automatic Brake Hold ....................... 70, 408
Automatic Brake Hold System ........... 70, 408
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 553 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
554
Index
Blind Spot Information (BSI) ............... 84, 400
Brake System (Amber)................................ 71
Brake System (Red) ............................ 68, 523
Charging System ............................... 72, 522
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ........................................... 84, 85
CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 78, 361
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 78, 360
Door and Trunk Open................................ 29
Electric Parking Brake................................. 69
Electric Parking Brake System............. 69, 524
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System............................................. 74, 524
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .............. 79
High Beam................................................. 77
Immobilizer System.................................... 77
Keyless Access System ............................... 78
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ................. 80
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .... 83, 391
Lights On................................................... 77
Low Fuel.................................................... 73
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 68, 522
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 76, 401, 403
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 72, 523
Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®)
System..................................................... 78
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 81
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 31, 73
Security System Alarm ............................... 77
Shift Lever Position .................................... 72
SPORT Mode ..................................... 78, 359
Supplemental Restraint System............ 49, 74
System Message........................................ 76
Transmission ............................................. 72
Turn Signal................................................ 77
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System ............................................ 75, 396
VSA® OFF .......................................... 75, 397
Information .............................................. 535
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 101
Instrument Panel ........................................ 67
Brightness Control................................... 148
Interface Dial ............................................ 196
Interior Lights ........................................... 163
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 153
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 510
Jump Starting ........................................... 516
K
Key Number Tag....................................... 117
Keyless Access System .............................. 120
Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 122
Keys ........................................................... 115
Lockout Prevention.................................. 122
Number Tag ............................................ 117
Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 126
Remote Transmitter................................. 118
Two-way Keyless Access Remote ..... 123, 350
Types and Functions................................ 115
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ...... 354
L
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 381
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 389
Language (HFL) ........................................ 294
LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 57
Lights ................................................ 141, 466
Automatic............................................... 142
Bulb Replacement ................................... 466
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 144
High Beam Indicator ................................. 77
Interior.................................................... 163
Light Switches......................................... 141
Lights On Indicator.................................... 77
Turn Signals ............................................ 140
Load Limits ............................................... 345
Locking/Unlocking ................................... 115
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 127
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 126
From Inside ............................................. 124
From Outside .......................................... 118
Keys........................................................ 115
Using a Key............................................. 122
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 122
Low Battery Charge ................................. 522
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 73
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal
Strength.................................................. 117
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 554 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
555
Index
Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 68, 522
Lower Anchors ........................................... 57
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)............. 345
Lumbar Support ....................................... 157
M
Maintenance ............................................ 445
Battery.................................................... 484
Brake Fluid.............................................. 465
Cleaning ................................................. 488
Climate Control System .......................... 487
Coolant .................................................. 462
Maintenance MinderTM............................ 449
Oil .......................................................... 458
Precautions ............................................. 446
Radiator.................................................. 463
Remote Transmitter ........................ 485, 486
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 466
Safety ..................................................... 447
Service Items........................................... 452
Tires........................................................ 475
Transmission Fluid................................... 464
Under the Hood...................................... 454
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 72, 523
Map Lights................................................ 164
Maximum Load Limit............................... 345
Meters, Gauges .......................................... 97
Mirrors ...................................................... 153
Adjusting ................................................ 153
Door ....................................................... 154
Exterior.................................................... 154
Interior Rearview ..................................... 153
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 443
Moonroof.................................................. 136
MP3 ................................................... 227, 251
Multi-Information Display ......................... 98
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 429
N
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 538
O
Odometer.................................................. 100
Oil (Engine) ....................................... 457, 537
Adding .................................................... 459
Checking................................................. 458
Displaying Oil Life .................................... 450
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 68, 522
Recommended Engine Oil................ 457, 537
Viscosity .......................................... 457, 537
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM ............. 197
Opening
Trunk ...................................................... 533
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 455
Moonroof................................................ 136
Power Windows ...................................... 134
Trunk ...................................................... 128
Operating the Switches Around the Steering
Wheel ...................................................... 137
Outside Temperature Display.................. 100
Overheating.............................................. 520
P
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift
Mode)...................................................... 358
Pandora®................................................... 249
Panic Mode ............................................... 133
Parking...................................................... 420
Parking Brake ........................................... 405
Parking Sensor System ............................. 421
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 50
Passing Indicators ..................................... 141
Power Rear Sunshade .............................. 179
Power Windows ....................................... 134
Precautions While Driving
Rain ........................................................ 353
Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®)
System ..................................................... 398
Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) System
Indicator.................................................... 78
Pregnant Women ....................................... 35
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 495
R
Radiator .................................................... 463
Radio (AM/FM) ......................................... 219
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 555 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
556
Index
Radio (SiriusXM®)...................................... 224
Radio Data System (RDS).......................... 221
Range ........................................................ 101
RDS (Radio Data System).......................... 221
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 541
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button...................................................... 149
Rear Seat Heaters ..................................... 178
Rear Temperature Control Dial ............... 189
Rearview Mirror........................................ 153
Refueling................................................... 440
Fuel Gauge ................................................ 97
Gasoline .......................................... 440, 536
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 73
Regulations ............................... 403, 478, 539
Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback ................................................. 350
Remote Transmitter.................................. 118
Replacement
Battery............................................. 485, 486
Bulbs ....................................................... 466
Fuses ....................................... 526, 528, 529
Tires ........................................................ 481
Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 472
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 540
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................. 100
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror........................... 154
Right Selector Wheel.......................... 98, 103
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).......... 385
On and Off .............................................. 386
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 25
Safety Check ............................................... 29
Safety Labels............................................... 65
Safety Message............................................. 1
Seat Belts .................................................... 30
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 34
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 32
Checking................................................... 36
e-pretensioners ......................................... 32
Fastening .................................................. 33
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 59
Pregnant Women ...................................... 35
Reminder ............................................ 31, 73
Warning Indicator ............................... 31, 73
Seat Heaters.............................. 176, 177, 178
Seats .......................................................... 156
Adjusting ................................................ 156
Front Seats .............................................. 156
Seat Heaters............................ 176, 177, 178
Security System......................................... 131
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 77
Security System Alarm Indicator................. 77
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 56
Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 357
Sequential Shift Mode Operation ........... 358
Setting the Clock ...................................... 114
Shift Lever........................................... 17, 355
Does Not Move ....................................... 519
Operation.......................................... 17, 356
Releasing ................................................ 519
Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 72, 356
Shifting (Transmission) ...................... 17, 355
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 34
Side Airbags ............................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 48
SiriusXM® Radio ....................................... 224
Snow Tires ................................................ 483
Spare Tire (Optional) ....................... 507, 537
Spark Plugs ............................................... 536
Specifications ........................................... 536
Specified Fuel ................................... 440, 536
SPORT Mode............................................. 359
SPORT Mode Indicator....................... 78, 359
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 40
Starting the Engine.................................. 348
Does Not Start ........................................ 513
Engine Switch Buzzer.............................. 137
Jump Starting ......................................... 516
Remote Engine Start ............................... 350
Steering Wheel
Adjusting ................................................ 152
Stopping ................................................... 420
Summer Tires............................................ 483
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 40
Surround View Camera System............... 430
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................ 4, 5, 137
System Message Indicator ......................... 76
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 556 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
557
Index
T
Temperature Sensor ................................ 190
Temporary Tire Repair Kit ....................... 496
Tie-down Anchors.................................... 173
Time (Setting)........................................... 114
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)..................................................... 401
Indicator ........................................... 76, 525
Tires .......................................................... 475
Air Pressure..................................... 476, 537
Chains .................................................... 483
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 475
Flat Tire (Puncture) .......................... 495, 507
Inspection ............................................... 475
Labeling.................................................. 476
Regulations............................................. 478
Rotation.................................................. 482
Spare (Optional).............................. 507, 537
Summer.................................................. 483
Temporary Tire Repair Kit........................ 496
Wear Indicators....................................... 480
Winter .................................................... 483
Tools ......................................................... 494
Towing a Trailer....................................... 347
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 347
Emergency.............................................. 531
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 401
Transmission....................................... 17, 355
Automatic................................. 17, 354, 355
Fluid ....................................................... 464
Number................................................... 538
Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 357
Shift Lever Position Indicator .............. 72, 356
TRIP Button ................................................. 99
Trip Meter ................................................. 100
Troubleshooting ....................................... 493
Blown Fuse.............................. 526, 528, 529
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 21
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 22
Emergency Towing .................................. 531
Engine Won’t Start .................................. 513
Flat Tire/Puncture............................. 495, 507
Noise When Braking .................................. 22
Overheating ............................................ 520
Premium Gasoline ........................... 440, 536
Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 21, 126
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 519
Warning Indicators .................................... 68
Trunk ......................................................... 128
Lid........................................................... 128
Light Bulbs .............................................. 536
Release Handle ........................................ 533
Unable to Open....................................... 533
Trunk Pass-through Cover........................ 174
Turn Signals .............................................. 140
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 77
Turn-by-Turn Directions ........................... 101
Two-way Keyless Access Remote ..... 123, 350
U
Unlocking the Doors ................................ 118
Unlocking the Front Doors from
the Inside .......................................... 12, 124
USB Flash Drives ....................................... 264
USB Port .................................................... 193
Using the Keyless Access System ............. 120
V
Valet Mode ............................................... 166
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 538
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 396
Off Button............................................... 397
Off Indicator...................................... 75, 397
System Indicator................................ 75, 396
Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 457, 537
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 396
W
Warning and Information Messages......... 86
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 522
Warning Labels........................................... 65
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 543
Watts......................................................... 536
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 480
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 510
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 557 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
558
Index
Window Washers...................................... 145
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 465
Switch ..................................................... 145
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 134
Windshield
Cleaning.......................................... 488, 491
Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 188
Washer Fluid............................................ 465
Wiper Blades ........................................... 472
Wipers and Washers ................................ 145
Winter Tires............................................... 483
Snow Tires............................................... 483
Tire Chains .............................................. 483
Wipers and Washers................................. 145
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 472
WMA ................................................. 227, 251
Worn Tires................................................. 475
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 558 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 559 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book 560 ページ ２０１４年１２月１６日　火曜日　午後５時３６分

Navigation menu